null  null
Section 3
Features
This section describes every basic, optional, and
programmable features in alphabetical order. It also provides
information about the conditions, connection references,
programming required, related features, and operation for
every feature.
A
3
Features
Absent Message Capability
Description
Once set this option provides a message, on the display of the
calling extension, to show the reason for the called extension’s
absence. Nine messages can be programmed as desired which are
available for every extension user. There are six pre-programmed
default messages. Setting or cancelling a message can be done by
individual extension users but only callers with a display telephone
can receive the message.
Conditions
• Six default messages, which are changeable, are shown below. The
“%” means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at
individual extension.
(1) Will Return Soon
(2) Gone Home
(3) At Ext %%% (extension number)
(4) Back at %% : %% (hour : minute)
(5) Out Until %% / %% (month / day or day / month)
(6) In a Meeting
• An extension user can select only one message at a time. The selected
message is displayed every time the user goes off-hook.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[008] Absent Messages
[100] Flexible Numbering, Absent message
[990] System Additional Information, Field (41)
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Absent Message Capability
Account Code Entry
Description
3-2
Features
An account code is used to identify incoming and outgoing outside
for accounting and billing purposes. The account code is appended
to the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record. For
incoming outside call, account codes are optional. For outgoing
outside call there are three modes available to enter an account
code: Verified-All Calls mode; Verified Toll Restriction Override
mode; and Option mode. One mode is selected for each extension
on a Class of Service basis.
3
A
Features
In Verified-All Calls mode, the user must always enter a preassigned account code when making any of the following calls
unless it has previously been stored in memory:
• Call Forwarding – to CO Line
• Last Number Redial
• Line Access
• Notebook Function
• One-Touch Dialing
• Pickup Dialing
• Saved Number Redial
• Station Speed Dialing
• System Speed Dialing
In Verified-Toll Restriction Override mode, the user can enter a preassigned account code only when the user needs to override toll
restriction.
In Option mode, the user can enter any account code when needed.
Conditions
• An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing (System / Station
Speed Dialing; Notebook Function; One-Touch Dialing; Pickup
Dialing; Call Forwarding – to CO Line).
• The Account button may be used in place of the feature number. A
flexible button on the proprietary telephone set can be programmed as
the Account button.
• If the account code stored in location 01 of the programming table is
used, the dialed number is not printed out to SMDR (Private Call).
• Account code entry after CPC detection must be done within 15
seconds. Otherwise, SMDR call record is activated and entry becomes
impossible afterwards.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Account code entry
[105] Account Codes
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Account Button
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Account Code Entry
Features
3-3
A
3
Features
Alternate Calling – Ring / Voice
Description
This system offers two methods of Intercom Calling: Ring-Calling
or Voice-Calling. Ring-Calling informs the called party of an
incoming call with a ring tone, while the Voice-Calling uses the
calling party’s voice. The called extension user, if a proprietary
telephone, can select tone or voice calling. If the user selects
Voice-Calling, the calling party can talk to the user immediately
after confirmation tone. The calling extension user is able to
change the calling method pre-selected once at a time by the called
extension by pressing “ ”; Ring-Calling can be switched to
Voice-Calling, and vice versa. This operation is available for both
proprietary and single line telephone users during calling.
Conditions
Single line telephone users can only receive Ring-Calling call.
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Intercom Alerting Assignment
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Handsfree Answerback
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Alternate Calling — Ring / Voice
Alert Indication
Description
If the following situations occur, the pre-warning indication is
displayed on the proprietary telephone of Operator 1 in Day mode.
Memory; When the system finds the wrong system data, the
indication “S.–Datenfehler 1” is displayed.
Printer; When the paper of the printer for SMDR runs out or the
printer is out-of-service, the indication “Drucker prüfen” is
displayed. Check the printer.
Connection*; When a system inter-connection error occurs and
system connection operation is interrupted, the indication
“Sys.–Link–Fehler” is displayed. Connect the interface between
the systems and press the Reset Button on both systems.
Conditions
3-4
Features
None
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3
A
Features
Programming Reference
No Programming required.
Feature Reference
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Operator Service Features,
Alert Indication
Answering, Direct CO Line
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to answer an incoming call
by simply pressing the appropriate CO button without lifting the
handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button. The user can specify
the line to be answered when multiple incoming lines are ringing.
Conditions
None
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Answering, Direct CO Line
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
Description
Allows the caller to be informed when the called party has
completed the current call.
Automatic Callback – Extension
If the caller answers the callback ringing, the called extension
automatically starts ringing again.
Automatic Callback – CO Line
If the caller answers the callback ringing, the line is automatically
selected to allow the user to make an outside call.
Conditions
• If the callback ringing is not answered in four rings (within 10 seconds)
the callback is cancelled.
• More than one extension user can set this function for the same
extension or CO line.
Features
3-5
A
3
Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic callback busy cancel
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
Automatic Configuration†
Description
The system sends the VPS data which contains the extension
number configuration information and the VPS automatically
creates mailboxes with this data (Quick Setup).
Conditions
The data is transmitted to the VPS on the lowest jack port.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Automatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer
Description
When Operator 1 is busy and the outside call reaches the Operator
1 directly, the incoming call can be waited until the waiting queue
is over assigned number. When the incoming call is over assigned
number, the last call will be transferred to the Operator 2.
(Automatic Overflow)
Operator 1 can refer the waiting queue with the indicator of the
Hurry-Up button, and transfer the first waiting call to the preassigned extension with the Hurry-Up button. (Hurry-Up Transfer)
Conditions
• Automatic Overflow does not function in the following cases;
a) The waiting queue is set “0.”
b) Operator 2 is not set.
c) Operator 1 belongs to Station Hunting Group.
• Hurry-Up Transfer does not function in the following cases;
a) The waiting queue is set “0.”
b) Hurry-Up Button is not assigned.
c) Operator 1 belongs to Station Hunting Group.
3-6
Features
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
3
A
Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[120] Operator Queue
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment, Hurry-Up Button
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Operator
Operation References
—User Manual
Operator Service Features,
Automatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer
Automatic Station Release
Description
After going off-hook, if an extension user fails to dial any digits
within a specified time period, the user will be disconnected from
the line after reorder tone is sent. To get a line again, the user must
go back on-hook and then off-hook.
Conditions
This function works in the following cases:
When making a call
(1)The first digit has not been dialed within 10 seconds.
(2)After a digit is dialed, the next one is not dialed within five
seconds (Intercom call only).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Background Music (BGM)
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to listen to background
music from the monitor speaker on the telephone.
Conditions
• The system has an internal or external music source. It may be
required to connect a user-supplied music source. Up to two sources
can be connected per system.
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features
3-7
AB
3
Features
It is required to select the internal or external music source by System
Programming for the music source 1.
• It is required to select a music source used for BGM by System
Programming.
• The BGM is interrupted while off-hooked.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.10 External Music Source Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[803] Music Source Use
[990] System Additional Information, Field (20)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Music on Hold
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Background Music (BGM)
Background Music (BGM) – External
Description
Background music (BGM) can be broadcasted in your office
through external pagers. The BGM can be turned on and off by
Operator.
Conditions
• It is required to connect an external pager and an external music
source. These are user-supplied item. Up to two pagers and up to two
external music sources can be installed per system. Two different
music sources can be used for each BGM and Music on Hold.
• Each pager can be programmed to send BGM or not.
• The access priority to external pager is: (1)TAFAS; (2)Paging;
(3)BGM. Higher priorities will override BGM.
• It is programmable to select an internal or external music source for
BGM.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
2.3.10 External Music Source Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Background music – external
3-8
Features
3
B
Features
[803] Music Source Use
[804] External Pager BGM
[990] System Additional Information, Field (20)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Background Music (BGM)
Operation References
—User Manual
Operator Service Features
Background Music (BGM) — External
Budget Management
Description
Limit the telephone usage to a pre-assigned amount. For example,
the limit may be the amount deposited during a hotel at check-in. If
the pre-assign limit is reached, the extension user cannot make
further calls until he/she receives authorization from the operator.
Conditions
None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[010] Budget Management
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port
[990] System Additional Information, Field (39)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
HOTEL APPLICATION
Operation References
Not applicable.
Busy Lamp Field
Description
The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the DSS (Direct
Station Selection) buttons, each of which corresponds to a selected
extension, tell whether the corresponding extensions are idle, busy
or in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode.
Conditions
• This function is available for DSS buttons on DSS Consoles and for
flexible CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on proprietary telephones.
• A DSS button indicator lights red if the corresponding extension is busy
or in DND mode.
Features
3-9
B
3
Features
• The DSS indicator on a proprietary telephone also informs you of
incoming calls except for the DIL 1:N and doorphone call to the
corresponding extensions. You can pick up calls by pressing the
corresponding flashing DSS buttons.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button
Feature References
Operation References
Section 3, Features,
Button, Direct Station
Selection (DSS)
DSS Console (KX-T7240)
Not applicable.
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
Description
When attempting to call a busy extension, Busy Station Signaling
allows you to signal the user on the phone to answer your call. The
called extension user hears a Call Waiting tone and is able to
answer the call.
Conditions
• This feature is effective when the called extension has enabled Call
Waiting. If Call Waiting is enabled, the caller will hear ringback tone;
if not, the caller will hear reorder tone.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Waiting
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Description
3-10
Features
The proprietary telephone user can access other extension users
with one touch of this button.
3
B
Features
Conditions
• A flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone can be assigned as a
DSS button using either System or Station Programming.
• DSS buttons are provided on DSS Consoles with default setting.
Changing the setting is possible from the paired telephone using Station
Programming.
• Once a button is assigned as a DSS button, it provides Busy Lamp Field
(BLF) status.
• The mode of a DSS button can be programmed to disconnect the CO
line and calls the extension or hold and transfer the call to the extension
(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Direct Station Selection (DSS) Button
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Busy Lamp Field
DSS Console (KX-T7240)
One-Touch Transfer by DSS
Button
Basic Operation,
Making Calls
PT Features,
Call Transfer – to Extension
DSS Console Features,
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Buttons
Button, Flexible
Description
The use of flexible buttons is determined by either System or
Station Programming. The following three types of flexible buttons
are provided on proprietary telephones (PT) and DSS Consoles:
• Flexible CO buttons (provided on PT only)
• Flexible DSS buttons (provided on DSS Console only)
• Programmable Feature (PF) buttons
(provided on DSS Console only)
Features
3-11
B
3
Features
The below-mentioned table shows all of the features which can be
assigned to flexible buttons.
In the table, “✔” indicates that the feature can be assigned to the
button.
Button
Features to be assigned
Single CO
Group CO
Loop CO
Alert
Hurry-Up
Log-In / Log-Out
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Live Call Screening†
Live Call Screening Cancel†
Message Waiting
Two-Way Record†
Two-Way Transfer†
Account Code Entry
Conference
FWD/DND
One-Touch Dialing
Saved Number Redial
Terminate
Voice Mail Transfer
Conditions
CO
(PT)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
DSS
(DSS)
PF
(DSS)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
• A CO line can only appear on one Single-CO button of any given
telephone. A station can only appear on one DSS button of any given
telephone or DSS Console.
• It is possible to have multiple appearances of the same Group-CO or
Loop-CO buttons on the same telephone. Incoming and outgoing calls
on the line are shown on the button in the following priority:
Single-CO > Group-CO > Loop-CO
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment
3-12
Features
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to
a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
3
B
Features
Feature References
Operation References
Section 3, Features,
Buttons on Proprietary Telephones
DSS Console (KX-T7240)
Not applicable.
Button, Group-CO (G-CO)
Description
To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a group of CO lines
(CO line group) can be assigned to a CO button. This assignment
is referred as to Group-CO (G-CO). Any incoming call from any
CO line in the CO line group arrives at the G-CO button. To make
a CO call, the user can access an idle CO line in the group by
simply pressing the dedicated G-CO button.
Conditions
• No G-CO button is originally provided on a proprietary telephone (PT).
It is programmable on a CO button by either System or Station
Programming.
• It is needed to program the extension for receiving and / or originating
calls on CO lines.
• It is possible to assign the same CO line group to more than one G-CO
buttons on the same PT.
• It is possible to assign the same line to an S-CO button and to a G-CO
button.
• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) can be
selected on an extension–CO line basis.
• The PT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each
G-CO button by System or Station Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Answering, Direct CO Line
CO Line Group
Line Access, CO Line Group
Line Access, Direct
Ringing Tone Selection for CO
Buttons
Features
3-13
B
3
Operation References
—User Manual
Features
Basic Operation,
Making Calls
Receiving Calls
PT Features,
Answering, Direct CO Line
Outward Dialing – Line Access, CO Line Group
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Description
All CO lines can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a
proprietary telephone (PT). The assigned button serves as a LoopCO (L-CO) button. An incoming call on any CO line arrives at the
L-CO, unless there is an S-CO or G-CO button associated with the
line or unless the button is already in use. To make an outside call,
the PT user can simply press the dedicated L-CO button.
Conditions
• No L-CO button is originally provided on a PT. A flexible CO button
can be assigned as an L-CO button in either System or Station
Programming.
• Pressing the L-CO button provides the same operation as entering the
automatic line access code.
• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) can be
selected on an extension–CO line basis.
• The PT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each
L-CO button by System or Station Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Loop-CO (L-CO) Button
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
3-14
Features
Section 3, Features,
Answering, Direct CO Line
Line Access, Automatic
Line Access, Direct
Ringing Tone Selection for CO
Buttons
Basic Operation,
Making Calls
Receiving Calls
PT Features,
Outward Dialing – Line Access, Automatic
3
B
Features
Button, Single CO (S-CO)
Description
A Single-CO (S-CO) button is a CO line access button. This
allows the proprietary telephone user to access a specific line by
pressing an S-CO button. An incoming call can be directed to an SCO button.
Conditions
• An S-CO button provides CO Line status.
• It is possible to assign one CO line to both an S-CO and a G-CO button.
• Incoming calls appear on the proprietary telephone, when an extension
is assigned as the incoming call destination and an S-CO, G-CO and/or
L-CO button is assigned.
• Immediate, delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) can be
selected on an extension–CO line basis.
• The proprietary telephone user can choose a desired ringing tone type
for the S-CO button by System or Station Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Answering, Direct CO Line
Line Access, Direct
Line Access, Individual
Ringing Tone Selection for CO
Buttons
Basic Operation,
Making Calls
Receiving Calls
PT Features,
Outward Dialing – Line Access, Individual
Features
3-15
B
3
Features
Buttons on Proprietary Telephones
Description
Proprietary telephones are provided with the feature / line access
buttons listed below:
Proprietary Telephones KX-T:
Buttons
AUTO ANSWER / MUTE †
AUTO DIAL / STORE †
CO † *
CONF †
FLASH
Function
FWD / DND †
HOLD
INTERCOM †
MESSAGE †
MONITOR
PAUSE
PROGRAM
REDIAL
SHIFT †
Soft
SP-PHONE †
TRANSFER
VOLUME
7230
✔
✔
✔ (24)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
7235
✔
✔
✔ (12)
✔
✔
✔(10)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔(3)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔(3)
✔
✔
✔
7250
✔!
✔ (6)
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ : The button is provided on the designated telephones.
† : The button is provided with Light Emitting Diode (LED).
* : The buttons which can be changed to function as a feature button are called
flexible buttons.
(x) : Shows the number of buttons only if multiple buttons are provided.
! : The button is provided without an LED.
The functions of the listed buttons are described below:
AUTO ANSWER / MUTE: This dual function button is used for
extension auto-answer and microphone mute during a conversation.
AUTO DIAL / STORE: Used for System Speed Dialing and
storing program changes.
CO (Central Office line): Can make or receive an outgoing call or
can be re-assigned to a different CO or to various feature buttons.
CONF (Conference): Used to establish a three-party conference.
FLASH: Sends a flash signal to the Central Office or a host PBX to
access their features (External Feature Access).
Function: Used to perform the displayed function / operation.
3-16
Features
3
B
Features
FWD / DND (Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb): Used to
program Call Forwarding and set Do Not Disturb.
HOLD: Used to place a call on hold.
INTERCOM: Used to make or receive intercom calls.
MESSAGE: Used to send a message or display current message.
MONITOR: Used for handsfree operation.
PAUSE: Inserts a pause in a speed dial number.
PROGRAM: Used to enter and exit Programming mode. With the
KX-T7250, it can be also used as the PAUSE button.
REDIAL: Used for Last Number or Automatic Redial.
SHIFT: Used to access the second level of Soft button function.
Soft: Pressing a Soft button performs the function / operation
appearing on the bottom line of the display.
SP-PHONE (Speakerphone): Used for handsfree operation.
Pressing the button causes the telephone to switch between handset
and handsfree operation.
TRANSFER: Transfers a call to another extension or external
destination.
VOLUME: Used to adjust the ringer and speaker volume and the
display contrast.
Conditions
• Certain buttons are equipped with light indicators (LED’s) to show
line or feature status.
• CO buttons can be classified as the following three types:
Single-CO (S-CO) button / Group-CO (G-CO) button / Loop-CO
(L- CO) button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Refer to respective operating instructions.
Features
3-17
C
3
Features
CALL FORWARDING FEATURES – SUMMARY
Description
Call forwarding features enable you to have your calls forwarded to
a specified destination. You may specify the circumstances under
which your calls are forwarded. The following Call Forwarding
features are available:
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Call Forwarding – Busy
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Call Forwarding – Follow Me
Call Forwarding – No Answer
Call Forwarding – to CO Line
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Description
This feature is used when you want all your calls to be
automatically re-directed to another extension.
Conditions
• Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are:
CO calls – DDI; DIL 1:1; DIL 1:N; Intercept Routing
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
• There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding
feature is not activated to the following destination extensions;
a) The extension is also in Call Forwarding.
b) The extension is in DND mode.
• Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The MESSAGE
button indicator is lit on the originally called extension.
• If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group, a call
directed to the extension is forwarded. Hunting still applies for calls
directed to other extensions in the Hunt group.
• Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding functions, if any.
• A floating station cannot be programmed as the forwarding destination.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / Do not disturb
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Forwarding — All Calls
3-18
Features
3
C
Features
Call Forwarding – Busy
Description
A call directed to your extension is forwarded to another extension
when your telephone is busy.
Conditions
• Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are:
Outside calls – DDI; DIL 1:1; DIL 1:N; Intercept Routing
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
• There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding
feature is not activated to the following destination extensions;
a) The extension is also in Call Forwarding.
b) The extension is in DND mode.
• Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The
MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension.
• If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group, a call
directed to the extension is forwarded. Station Hunting still applies for
calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group.
• Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding functions, if any.
• A floating station cannot be programmed as the forwarding destination.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / Do not disturb
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Forwarding — Busy
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Description
Your calls are forwarded to another extension when your extension
is busy or you do not answer the call in a pre-determined time.
Conditions
• Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are:
Outside calls – DDI; DIL 1:1; DIL 1:N; Intercept Routing
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
• This function operates the same way as Call Forwarding – Busy and
Call Forwarding – No Answer.
Features
3-19
C
3
Features
• There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding
feature is not activated to the following destination extensions;
a) The extension is also in Call Forwarding.
b) The extension is in DND mode.
• Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The MESSAGE
button indicator is lit on the originally called extension.
• If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group, a call
directed to the extension is forwarded. Station Hunting still applies for
calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group.
• Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding functions, if any.
• A floating station cannot be programmed as the forwarding destination.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – Busy
Call Forwarding – No Answer
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Forwarding — Busy / No Answer
Call Forwarding – Follow Me
Description
When you forget to set Call Forwarding – All Calls before you
leave your desk or when you move from pre-set place to another,
this allows you to set the same function from the destination
extension.
Conditions
• Same as the conditions of Call Forwarding – All Calls.
• It is programmable to enable or disable this feature on Class of Service
basis.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[991] COS Additional Information, Field (1)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD / DND Button
3-20
Features
3
C
Features
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Forwarding — Follow Me
Call Forwarding – No Answer
Description
Calls to your extension are forwarded to another extension when
you do not answer the call in a pre-determined time.
Conditions
• Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are:
Outside calls – DDI; DIL 1:1; DIL 1:N; Intercept Routing
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
• This function operates if an incoming call is not answered in a specific
period of time. Therefore, this function also applies if your extension is
busy and cannot answer the incoming call within the time.
• There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding. The Call Forwarding
feature is not activated to the following destination extensions;
a) The extension is also in Call Forwarding.
b) The extension is in DND mode.
• Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The MESSAGE
button indicator is lit on the originally called extension.
• If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group, a call
directed to the extension is forwarded. Station Hunting still applies for
calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group.
• Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding functions, if any.
• A floating station cannot be programmed as the forwarding destination.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Forwarding — No Answer
Features
3-21
C
3
Features
Call Forwarding – to CO Line
Description
Calls directed to your extension will be sent to an external
destination. The outside telephone number must be preprogrammed.
Conditions
• Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are:
Outside calls – DIL 1:1; DDI (ISDN Service only)
Intercom calls – Extension; Transfer
• The forwarding extension’s Toll Restriction and Account Code Entry
requirements still apply.
• Although calls are forwarded, Message Waiting is not. The MESSAGE
button indicator is lit on the originally called extension.
• If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call
directed to the extension is forwarded. Station Hunting still applies for
calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group.
• Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding functions, if any.
• Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to
perform the function.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Forwarding — to CO Line
Call Hold – CO Line
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to put an outside call on hold.
The held call can be retrieved from the user who held it or from any
other extension.
Conditions
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall
results.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 15 minutes, it
is automatically disconnected.
3-22
Features
3
C
Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Hold Recall
Music on Hold
PT Features,
Call Hold
Call Hold – Intercom
Description
This is used to place an intercom call on hold for the proprietary
telephone user. The held call can be retrieved from the user who
held it or from any other extension.
Conditions
• Only one intercom call can be placed on hold in a telephone at a time.
Outside calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same
time.
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall
results.
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call hold
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Call Park
Hold Recall
Music on Hold
PT Features,
Call Hold
Call Hold, Exclusive – CO Line
Description
Allows the extension user to prevent any other extension users from
retrieving a held outside call. Only the user who held it can retrieve
the call.
Features
3-23
C
3
Conditions
Features
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall
results. After Hold Recall results, the held call can be retrieved from
any other extension.
• If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 15 minutes, it
is automatically disconnected.
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
• With a single line telephone, either one outside or intercom call can be
held.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Hold Recall
Music on Hold
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Hold, Exclusive
Call Hold, Exclusive – Intercom
Description
Allows the extension user to prevent any other extension users from
retrieving a held intercom call. Only the user who held it can
retrieve the call.
Conditions
• Only one intercom call can be placed on Call Hold or Exclusive Call
Hold at a time.
• If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time, Hold Recall
results. After Hold Recall results, the held call can be retrieved from
any other extension.
• Music is sent to the party on hold, if available (Music on Hold).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
3-24
Features
Section 3, Features,
Hold Recall
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Hold, Exclusive
Music on Hold
3
C
Features
Call Hold Retrieve – CO Line
Description
Allows the extension user to retrieve a specified outside call that
has been placed on hold by another extension, except for the
exclusive hold.
Conditions
Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the
feature number. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Hold retrieve – CO line
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Hold – CO Line
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Hold Retrieve
Call Hold Retrieve – Intercom
Description
Allows the extension user to retrieve a call that has been placed on
hold by another extension, except for the exclusive hold.
Conditions
Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the
feature number. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Hold retrieve – intercom
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Hold – Intercom
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Hold Retrieve
Features
3-25
C
3
Features
Call Log, Incoming
Description
Provides the external calling party's information on the display
proprietary telephone when the extension user does not answer the
call. The phone number and name can be displayed when the
number and the name are stored in list of System Speed Dialing.
The stored number or modified number, if needed can be used to
call back the party. This feature is available, if the Caller ID or
Calling Line Identification Presentation service is obtained from the
Central Office.
The displayed information are follows;
a) The party's phone number and name
b) The day and time of the call was made
c) The calling attempt time of the same person
d) The receiving CO line number and name
Conditions
• Up to 15 calls can be stored on an extension basis. It is programmable
to assign whether the 16th call will be unacceptable or the oldest call is
replaced by the newest call that is received after 15 calls are stored.
• If the LED indicator of the SHIFT button is red, the user finds that there
were some unanswered call.
• This feature is only available for KX-T7235 and KX-T7230.
• It is possible to prevent the other user from referring the call log on the
extension. The operator 1 also can set or cancel the prevention
remotely (Call Log Lock Control).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call log, incoming, Call log lock control,
incoming
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, Operator Features,
Call Log, Incoming
Operator Service Features,
Call Log Lock Control, Incoming
3-26
Features
3
C
Features
Call Park
Description
Allows the extension user to place a held call into a system parking
area. This releases the user from the parked call to perform other
operations. The parked call can be retrieved from any other
extension user.
Conditions
• The system contains 10 parking areas, each of which has its own call
park number. Up to 10 calls can be parked at the same time in the
system. Under the System Connection*, all users may access the same
call parking area. The number of holding slots remains at 10.
• If a parked call is not retrieved within Transfer Recall Timer period,
Transfer Recall starts to the operator or the extension that parked the
call.
• If Call Park Recall is not retrieved in 15 minutes, it is automatically
disconnected.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the parked call is retrieved.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call park / call park retrieve
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (11), (16)
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Park
Call Pickup, CO Line
Description
Allows any extension user to answer an incoming outside call that
is ringing at another’s telephone.
Conditions
• Call Pickup starts with the lowest CO number.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, CO line
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features
3-27
C
3
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Pickup, CO Line
Features
Call Pickup, Directed
Description
Allows any extension user to answer a call ringing at any other
extension.
Conditions
• Doorphone call can be picked up from extensions that are not
programmed to answer a doorphone call.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• You can pick up a call by pressing a flashing DSS button assigned on a
proprietary telephone.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, directed
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Pickup, Directed
Call Pickup, Group
Description
Allows the extension user to answer a call that is ringing at another
telephone, if the call is ringing within the user’s extension group.
Conditions
• The user can pick up an incoming outside, intercom, or doorphone call.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup, group
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Pickup, Group
3-28
Features
3
C
Features
Call Pickup Deny
Description
Allows the user to prohibit other extensions from picking up calls
ringing at his / her extension by using the call pickup features.
Conditions
Distinctive Dial Tone is sent to the user on the extension with this feature
when the user goes off-hook.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call pickup deny
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Call Pickup, CO Line
Call Pickup, Directed
Call Pickup, Group
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Pickup Deny
Call Splitting
Description
Allows the extension user to alternate between two other parties.
Placing the current call on hold by pressing another CO /
INTERCOM button allows the user to have a conversation with the
other party.
Conditions
Call Splitting is impossible during Doorphone Call or Paging.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Splitting
Features
3-29
C
3
Features
CALL TRANSFER FEATURES – SUMMARY
Description
Call Transfer features allow the user to transfer a call to another
party. This operation can be screened or unscreened. Screened
call transfer is used when you want to announce the call to the
other party before completing the transfer. Unscreened call
transfer immediately releases the caller to the called party. An
intercom or an outside call can be transferred to an extension or to
an outside party by:
Call Transfer, Screened – to CO Line
Call Transfer, Screened – to Extension
Call Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension
Call Transfer, Screened – to CO Line
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to voice-announce to the
external party and transfer the call.
Conditions
• Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able
to perform it.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[990] System Additional Information, Field (1)
Feature References
None
Operation Reference
—User Manual
PT Features,
Call Transfer — to CO Line
Call Transfer, Screened – to Extension
Description
Allows the extension user to voice-announce to the extension and
transfer the call.
Conditions
None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[990] System Additional Information, Field (1)
3-30
Features
3
C
Features
Feature References
None
Operation Reference
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Transfer — to Extension
Call Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension
Description
Allows the user to transfer an intercom or outside to directly
transfer to an extension party. After dialing the destination
extension, the user replaces the handset while hearing ringback
tone.
Conditions
• If the destination party does not answer within the transfer recall time,
the call will return to the user or operator.
• This function is possible when the destination is sending ringback or
busy tone. If the destination is busy, Camp-On Transfer occurs.
• The ringing signal pattern follows the regular ringing pattern depending
on the party being transferred: outside or intercom call ringing.
• It is possible for any extension user to transfer a call to the modem* for
remote maintenance.
• If music on hold is enabled, music is sent to the party while being
transferred. It is system-programmable whether to send ringback tone
or music on hold to the caller.
• If the destination party does not answer within the transfer recall time,
the call will return to the user or operator.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (1), (11)
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Transfer — to Extension
Call Waiting
Description
While in conversation, a call waiting tone informs the user of
another incoming call that is waiting. He or she can answer the
second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold.
Call waiting tone can be enabled or disabled by dialing the
appropriate feature number.
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features
3-31
C
3
Conditions
Features
• The call waiting tone is generated when an outside call comes in or
when an extension caller executes Busy Station Signaling.
• Setting Data Line Security cancels Call Waiting which has been turned
on.
• For proprietary telephone users, two types of call waiting tone are
provided to prevent them from missing the tone as shown below:
A proprietary telephone user can select the desired type by Station
Programming.
15 s
Tone 1
5s
Tone 2
Outside Call
IntercomCall
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call waiting
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Call Waiting
Caller ID
Description
3-32
Features
Provides the calling party's phone number and/or name of the called
party's display proprietary telephone before the called party
answers the outside call. If the number and/or name are stored in
the list of the System Speed Dialing, the number and/or name are
provided. When neither number nor name is stored in the list, the
number sent from ISDN is displayed. This feature is one of the
ISDN services.
3
C
Features
Conditions
• Up to 500 entries of number and name can be stored in the list of the
System Speed Dialing by System Programming.
• If the calling party restricts the presentation of calling line
identification, neither the phone number nor the name is displayed
(Calling Line Identification Restriction).
• The name is not displayed, when the corresponding stored number
includes the Flash and Pause, — (hyphen) or Secret button, following
to the line access code and — (hyphen).
• Caller ID will override CO Line Name Display on the extension except
the operator extension. The display can be alternated between Caller ID
and CO Line Name Display.
Programming Reference
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Display Call Information
Caller ID to RS-232C Port
Description
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) also automatically
records detailed call information in the following cases:
A) When an incoming call occurs.
B) When an incoming call is answered by the extension.
C) When an incoming call disappears because nobody
answered it.
If CO lines receive a call, when Caller ID is available, SMDR
records the name (14 characters max.).
“Ring” in the SMDR printout format indicates the ring duration of
the incoming call in Minutes / Seconds.
Features
3-33
C
3
Features
Printed call record example:
Date
A)
B)
C)
Time
Ext
Department code
CO
Dial Number
Ring
Duration
24.03.94 10:03 201 12345
01
1234567890123456789012 00:05'12
00007. 00FR 12345
24.03.94 10:07 203 00001
20
<K>*
00000. 00FR
24.03.94 10:08
03
<K>* MARY WARD
24.03.94 10:09 134
03
<K>* 0924312111 0'20
AN
24.03.94 10:11
03
<K>* 1022220
NA
00:00'56
Charge
Code
CD
RC
0'45
*<K> = <INCOMING>
Explanation
A) An incoming call from CO line 3 appears when Caller ID
is available.
“RC” is the Condition Code for “Receive”.
B) An incoming call from CO line 3 is answered by the
extension 134 when Caller ID is not available. It took 20
seconds to answer the call.
“AN” is the Condition Code for “Answer”.
C) An incoming call from CO line 3 disappeared because
nobody answered the call within 45 seconds when Caller
ID was not available.
“NA” is the Condition Code for “No Answer”.
Conditions
• Connect a printer provided with an EIA (RS-232C) interface to the EIA
(RS-232C) connector located on the main unit.
• It is possible to select whether the SMDR prints out the information of
incoming calls (RC) and answered incoming calls (AN).
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.10 Printer Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[000] Date and Time Set
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format
[802] System Data Printout
[806]–[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters
[990] System Additional Information, Field (43)
Feature References
3-34
Features
Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
3
C
Features
Operation References
Not applicable.
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Description
Allows the extension user to restrict the presentation of the calling
party's number to the called party when making a call. This feature
is one of the ISDN services.
Conditions
If the presentation is enabled, the called party can check the calling
party's number before the called party is answered it (Calling Line
Identification Presentation, CLIP – case by case).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, CLIR
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Caller ID
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Charge Fee Reference
Description
Allows the pre-assigned display telephone user to see, clear
charges and print out the data by SMDR. Charges are displayed per
extension, CO line, account code, department code, or the total of
each can be referred to.
Conditions
• The allowed extension is determined by System Programming.
• The verification ID is required to perform this feature.
• The maximum 99999 calls can be collected. The existing call is not
referred.
• It is programmable to select the first display, Frequency or Charge by
System Programming. This can be switched manually at each
extension.
• Exchange rate between Frequency counter and Charges is assigned by
Station Programming.
Features
3-35
C
3
Features
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by [125]
Assignment of Denomination.
• If the amount exceeds the maximum displayable charge, then only the
highest possible charge will be displayed (e.g. 99999.99FR).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[117] Charge Display Selection
[118] Charge Verification Assignment
[119] Charge Verification ID Code Set
[125] Assignment of Denomination
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Charge Fee Reference
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Station Programming,
Charge Fee Reference
Class of Service (COS)
Description
COS is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of
extensions. Each extension is assigned a primary and a secondary
COS numbers. Eight Classes of Service are available.
Conditions
• The operator can switch the extension's COS between a primary and a
secondary.
• A list of the programmable items is given below:
(1) The ability to forward a call to an outside party
(2) The ability to transfer a call to an outside party
(3) The ability to override Do Not Disturb of the called station
(4) Account Code Entry operation – verified - all calls / verified toll restriction override / option
(5) The ability to set Executive Busy Override
(6) The ability to deny Executive Busy Override
(7) Outgoing call restriction level (Day mode / Night mode)
(8) The ability to set Call Forwarding – Follow Me
(9) System speed dialing call restriction level (Day mode / Night
mode)
(10) The ability to switch the Day/Night service
(11) The ability to unlock the door opener
(12) The ability to turn on the external relay
(13) The ability to set Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
(14) The ability to set Connected Line Identification Restriction
(15) The ability to set Calling Line Identification Restriction
3-36
Features
3
C
Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering Primary COS select, Secondary COS select
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
[509]-[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialing–Day/Night
[511] Door Opener Access
[512] External Relay Access
[513] Night Service Access
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
[516] Calling Line Identification Restriction
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction
[601] Class of Service
[613] ISDN Class of Service
[991] COS Additional Information
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Operator Service Features,
Class of Service (COS) Switch
CO Line Connection Assignment
Description
This allows you to specify the CO lines connected to your system
to prevent an extension user from originating an outside call by
selecting a line which is not connected. An idle line is selected
from the connected ones when an extension user makes an
Automatic Line Access.
Conditions
• If the user tries to make a call with a disconnected line, reorder tone
sounds to indicate that the line is out of use.
• This is effective for all outgoing calls.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Features
3-37
C
3
CO Line
Features
Connection Assignment – Outgoing
Description
Allows you to assign the CO line an extension user can use for
outgoing calls. This feature is useful to prevent unauthorized toll
calls.
Conditions
• When an extension user tries to make an outside call on a disallowed
CO line, reorder tone is sent to indicate that the user cannot use the CO
line.
• Day and Night Service are individually programmed. (Night Service)
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
[615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night for
ISDN Extension
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
CO Line Group
Description
CO lines can be grouped into up to eight CO line groups. This
allows extensions to call outside parties without designating a
specific CO line, since a CO line is automatically selected from the
designated CO line group. All CO lines belonging to a CO line
group follow the assignment determined for that CO line group. A
list of assignments for each CO line group is shown as follows:
• The destination of Intercept Routing (Day / Night)
• Disconnect Time
• Flash Time
• Host PBX Access Code
• Pause Time (used in Speed Dialing and Flash)
Conditions
• Each CO line can only belong to one CO line group.
• CO lines in a CO line group are selected uniformly if all lines belong to
the same system.
• If System Connection* is employed, a CO line group can include CO
lines in both systems. In this case, a CO line is first selected from the
user’s system. If all lines in the user’s system are in use, a line in the
other system is selected.
3-38
Features
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3
C
Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, CO line group line access
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
[411] Host PBX Access Codes
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
CO Line Name Display
Description
Provide the display proprietary telephone user with the preset CO
line name if an incoming outside call arrives at the telephone. The
operator may answer the call, after confirming the name of the
called destination when the multiple companies or divisions share
the system.
Conditions
• It is required to give names to CO lines by System Programming.
• Caller ID feature will override this feature on the extension except the
operator.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[421] CO Line Name Assignment
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Conference
Description
The system supports three-party conference calls, including outside
or inside parties. During a two-party conversation, the extension
user can add a third party to their conversation, thereby establishing
a conference.
Conditions
• Possible conference combinations are: 1-inside and 2-outsides; 2-inside
and 1-outside; and 3-inside.
• Up to six conference calls are allowed simultaneously.
• A three-party call is also established by Executive Busy Override.
Features
3-39
C
3
Features
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a
confirmation tone is sent to all three parties. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Field (13)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Conference (CONF) Button
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Executive Busy Override – CO Line
Executive Busy Override – Extension
PT Features, SLT Features;
Conference
Confirmation Tone
Description
At the end of many different functions the system confirms the
success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the
extension user through the speaker of the telephone.
Confirmation tone 1:
(a) Indicates that the new setting differs from the previous setting.
(b) Set or cancel the Electronic Station Lockout.
1s
Confirmation tone 2:
(a) Indicates that the new setting is identical to the previous setting.
(b) In addition, sent when various features are successfully
performed or accessed. (e.g. Call Hold; Automatic Callback Busy)
(c) Sent when accessing external paging equipment. (e.g. Paging –
All; Paging – External) Confirmation tone from external pager can
be enabled or disabled.
1s
3-40
Features
3
C
Features
Confirmation tone 3:
Sent when a conversation is established just after dialing.
For example, when accessing the following features by the feature
numbers:
• Call Park Retrieve
• Call Pickup
• Hold Retrieve
• Paging / Paging Answer
• TAFAS Answer
This tone can be eliminated by System Programming so that the
user can start talking instantly.
1s
Confirmation tone 4:
Sent when moving from a two-party call to a three-party call, and
vice versa. (These are caused by Executive Busy Override or
Conference.) It is possible to eliminate this tone by System
Programming.
1s
Conditions
Confirmation Tone 1 and 2 are provided to reconfirm the assigned
feature.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (13), (16)
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Features
3-41
C
3
Features
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
Description
Allows the extension user to restrict the presentation of the called
party's number to the calling party when the calling party is making
the call. This feature is one of the ISDN services.
Conditions
If the presentation is enabled, the calling party can check the the called
party's number before the called party is answered it (Connected Line
Identification Presentation).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, COLR
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
[517] Connected Line Identification Restriction
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Connected Line Indication Restriction (COLR)
3-42
Features
D
3
Features
Data Line Security
Description
Data Line Security is a function that can be set by System
Programming. Once set, communication between the extension
and the other end is protected from any signal such as Call
Waiting, Hold Recall and from Executive Busy Override. Data
equipment or a facsimile may be connected to an extension jack so
that the user can perform data communications. During the
communication, Data Line Security maintains secure data
transmission against tones or barging in from other extensions.
Conditions
• Assigning Data Line Security always offers conversation privacy.
• If one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security, it applies
to the both extensions.
• The Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA) feature is not available for
incoming calls to the extensions to which the Data Line Security
feature is assigned.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[612] Data Line Security
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Department Codes
Description
A department code is used to identify outgoing outside calls on
extension basis for accounting and billing purpose. The
department code is automatically appended to the Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR) call record without entering the code.
Conditions
• The department code is assigned up to 5 digits on an extension basis.
• It is possible to print out the data from SMDR on the department code
basis.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[610] Department Codes
[614] Department Codes of ISDN Port
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
3-43
Features
3
D
Features
Dial Tone, Distinctive
Description
Four types of dial tone patterns are available to give some
information about features enabled on the telephone set.
Dial tone 1: Normal dial tone. None of the features listed below
1s
are enabled.
Dial tone 2: Sounds when any one of the features below are set.
Absent Message Capability
Background Music (BGM) (for proprietary telephones only)
Call Forwarding
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Electronic Station Lockout
Executive Busy Override Deny
Pickup Dialing
Timed Reminder
1s
Dial tone 3: Sounds when performing Account Code Entry.
1s
Dial tone 4: Sounds when messages are waiting for the proprietary
telephone extension.
1s
Conditions
None
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Features
3-44
D
3
Features
Direct Dialing In (DDI)
Description
Allows the external caller to connect to the calling party in the
system directly. Assignable destinations are: (1)Operator;
(2)extension; (3)Uniform Calling Distribution (UCD); (4)TAFAS;
(5) external ringer; (6) modem*.
This feature is one of the ISDN services.
Conditions
• If an improper number is entered, the call will be transferred to the
operator.
• It is possible to reject to answer the direct dialing in call on Class of
Service basis.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[111] DDI Removed Digit/Added Number Assignment
[112] DDI Number for Operator Assignment
[420] Direct Dialing In
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (33), (34)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
Operation References
Not Applicable.
Direct In Lines (DIL)
Description
Enables an incoming outside call to go directly to one or more
answering points.
DIL 1:1 puts an incoming outside call to a single destination.
Assignable destinations are: (1) extension; (2) modem*;
(3) external pager; (4) external ringer. This CO line can be used by
multiple extension users to make calls but can be used by only one
extension to receive calls.
DIL 1:N puts an incoming outside call to multiple destinations.
Assignable destinations are extensions only. This CO line can be
used by multiple extension users to make and receive calls.
Both DIL 1:1 and 1:N can have different destinations for day and
night modes (Night Service).
Conditions
• If a CO line is programmed for both DIL 1:1 and DIL 1:N, it is
regarded as a DIL 1:1 line.
3-45
Features
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3
D
Features
• DIL 1:1 to the modem* allows the caller to perform remote
administration. DIL 1:1 to an external pager or ringer sounds the pager
or ringer when receiving incoming calls (TAFAS feature).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Display, Call Information
Description
The display proprietary telephone shows the user the following call
information:
Extension number and name
These are shown when calling or when called by an
extension user and during an established intercom call.
A display example: 123: John Lay
Dialed telephone number
This is shown when dialing the telephone number.
A display example: 91234567890
CO Line number
This is shown when receiving an outside call.
A display example: CO 03
Number or name of the caller
These are shown before answering if the Caller ID feature is
available.
A display examples : 0412599090
: Panasonic
CO Line Name
This is shown when CO Line is received a call.
A display example: CO 03: Panasonic
Charge Meter
This is shown during an established outside call.
A display example: CO 02: 00005
Charge Fee
This is shown during an established outside call.
A display example: CO 01: 00001.15 FR
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features
3-46
D
3
Features
Duration Time
This is shown during an established incoming outside call.
A display example: CO 01 0: 02' 05
Conditions
• Extension numbers and names are programmable. If no extension
name is stored, only the extension number is displayed.
• It is programmable to select the first display, Charge Meter or Charge
Fee by System Programming. To alternate another display, press the
CO button.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by [125]
Assignment of Denomination.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[117] Charge Display Selection
[125] Assignment of Denomination
[212] Call Duration Count Start Time
[412] CO Line Name Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual
Charge Fee Reference – New Rate Set
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Caller ID
CO Line Name Display
Charge Fee Reference
PT Features,
Display Call Information
Display, Self-Extension Number
Description
Allows the display proprietary telephone user to display their own
jack number and extension number in Station Programming mode.
Conditions
Display example
If the jack number is 02 and the extension number is 102:
Jack02<=>EXT102
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Self-Extension Number Confirmation
Feature References
3-47
Features
None
3
D
Features
Operation References
Not applicable.
Display, Time and Date
Description
Offers the display proprietary telephone user a display of either the
present time and the date or the date and the day of the week. It is
displayed while on-hook.
Conditions
• There are two types of display:
Display example 1: Day, Month, Time
1 Jan
13:00
Display example 2: Day, Month, Year, Day of the Week
1 Jan 1994
SAT
• The present date and time are set by System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[000] Date and Time Set
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Appendix
Display Examples
Display Contrast Adjustment
Description
Allows the display proprietary telephone user to adjust the display
contrast.
Conditions
Soft buttons and Volume button are used to sharpen the contrast to one of
three levels.
Programming References
Configuration....................................................................User Manual,
Display Contrast Adjustment (KX-T7230 and KX-T7235 only)
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Features
3-48
D
3
Features
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Description
Allows an extension user to appear busy to an incoming extension
call or allows to transfer an incoming outside call to the assigned
extension. This can be set or cancelled by the extension user.
Conditions
• If your proprietary telephone (PT) is not supplied with the FWD/DND
button, it can be assigned on a flexible button.
• DND does not work for the following calls: doorphone calls; recalls for
hold / Timed Reminder alarm.
• A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing the button
showing the arrival of the call.
• An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who
are allowed to override DND in their Class of Service (Do Not Disturb
Override).
• The following extension cannot set DND: operator, the Call Forwarding
(C.FWD) destination or the DND destination.
• When the extension has set the C.FWD, DND or DND for Direct
Dialing In Call, the extension cannot be a DND destination.
• Setting this feature cancels C.FWD or DND for Direct Dialing In Call.
• If the destination extension has DND activated, then the DSS button
corresponding to it will light up red. This indicates to the proprietary
telephone or DSS console user that the destination extension is
unavailable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – FWD/DND Button
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
3-49
Features
Section 3, Features,
Do Not Disturb for Direct
Dialing In Call
PT Features, SLT Features;
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
3
D
Features
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
Description
Allows the pre-assigned extension user to reject to answer the direct
dialing in call on Class of Service basis. The rejected call will be
transferred to an operator. The operator cannot reject the direct dialing
in call. This feature is one of the ISDN services.
Conditions
• Setting this feature cancels Call Forwarding or DND.
• If the destination extension has DND activated, then the DSS button
corresponding to it will light up red. This indicates to the proprietary
telephone or DSS console user that the destination extension is
unavailable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Do not disturb for DDI
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Direct Dialing In (DDI)
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Do Not Disturb For Direct Dialing In Call
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Description
Permits the pre-assigned extension user to call another user who
sets the Do Not Disturb feature. In this case the caller can override
the DND programmed on the called extension’s telephone and
causes the telephone to ring.
Conditions
Class of Service (COS) programming determines the extension users
who can perform DND Override.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Features
3-50
D
3
Features
Door Opener
Description
Allows the extension users to unlock the door for a visitor from
their telephones. The door can be unlocked by the extension users
on pre-assigned Class of Service. However, while engaged on a
doorphone call, any extension user can open the door from the
telephone to let the visitor in.
Conditions
• It is needed to install a user-supplied door opener on each door to be
opened. Two door openers can be installed on each system. System
Connection* provides for four door openers.
• When a visitor presses the Call button on the doorphone, the system
may automatically open the door, if the doorphone has a built-in door
opener. It is required to set by the System Programming.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.7. Door Opener Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Door opener
[122] Automatic Door Open Assignment
[511] Door Open Access
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Doorphone Call
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Doorphone Call
Doorphone Call
Description
Your system supports a doorphone. If a visitor presses the
doorphone button, pre-assigned extensions are rung. The extension
who answers the call can talk to the visitor. It is possible for any
extension user to originate a call to a doorphone.
Conditions
• It is needed to install a user-supplied Doorphone.
• One doorphone can be installed on each system. System Connection*
provides for two doorphones.
• It is necessary to program the extensions that can receive calls from
each doorphone during day and night mode.
3-51
Features
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3
D
Features
• If no extension user answers an incoming doorphone call within 30
seconds, the call stops ringing and is cancelled.
• While engaged on a doorphone call, any extension user can open the
door from the telephone to let the visitor in (Door Opener). This
requires a user-supplied door opener.
• If the doorphone call is placed on hold, the Music on Hold is not
available.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation
2.3.7 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Doorphone call
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Door Opener
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Doorphone Call
DSS Console (KX-T7240)
Description
The Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console provides direct access
to stations and busy lamp display as well as providing 16 PF
(Programmable Feature) buttons.
The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a proprietary
telephone (PT). System Programming assigns the jack numbers of
the DSS Console and its associated PT.
Up to four consoles can be installed for KX-TD816. Up to eight
consoles can be installed per system for KX-TD1232. The paired
telephone user can carry out the following operations using the
DSS Console:
• Direct access to an extension (Direct Station Selection)
• Quick access to an outside party (One-Touch Dialing)
• Easy transfer of an outside call to an extension
(The programmable One-Touch Transfer feature provides
simplified operation.)
• Quick access to a system feature
The above functions are enabled simply by pressing buttons on the
console which were pre-programmed as function buttons.
A DSS Console has two types of buttons as shown on the
following page:
Features
3-52
D
3
Features
DSS Console KX-T7240
DIGITAL
S1
S9
S17
S25
F1
F9
S2
S10
S18
S26
F2
F10
S3
S11
S19
S27
F3
F11
S4
S12
S20
S28
F4
F12
S5
S13
S21
S29
F5
F13
S6
S14
S22
S30
F6
F14
S7
S15
S23
S31
F7
F15
S8
S16
S24
S32
F8
F16
DSS buttons
PF buttons
DSS (Direct Station Selection) buttons: Used to access
extensions. Every button is programmed to correspond to an
extension. Pressing a button allows the user to call the
corresponding extension. Every button is provided with an
indicator (Busy Lamp Field), which shows the current state of the
corresponding extension as shown in the Table below:
To meet the user’s various needs, DSS buttons can be changed to
the other function buttons.
Light
State of extension
Off
Idle
On
Busy / DND
Busy Lamp Field Table
PF (Programmable Feature) buttons printed as F1 through
F16: These buttons are provided with no default setting. The
paired telephone user can program the buttons for the other
function buttons.
3-53
Features
3
Features
Conditions
DE
• Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the
paired telephone using Station Programming or Programming with
Personal Computer. System Programming with Proprietary Telephone
is not available.
• If the extension number assigned to a DSS button is changed to another
number, the DSS button automatically follows the new number. (Reprogramming is not necessary.)
• During System Connection*, DSS Consoles must be paired with
telephones in the same system.
• If a port connected to a DSS Console is programmed for XDP jack, an
SLT can be connected to the port in parallel.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.2 Extension Connection
2.4.5 Extension Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[007] DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
[600] Extra Device Port
Station Programming ......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Extra Device Port (XDP)
One-Touch Transfer by DSS
Button
DSS Console Features
Electronic Station Lockout
Description
Allows the extension users to lock their stations so that other users
cannot make outgoing outside calls. Any 3-digit numeric code can
be used to lock the station. The same code is used to unlock it.
Conditions
• Making intercom calls and receiving intercom or outside calls are
permitted on the locked station.
• The new setting overrides the old one. If Operator sets Remote Station
Lock on a station that has already been locked by the station user, the
user cannot unlock it.
• It is programmable to admit the press of the Terminate button during a
outside call on the locked station.
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features
3-54
E
3
Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Electronic station lockout
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Remote Station Lock Control
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Electronic Station Lockout
Emergency Call
Description
Allows the extension user to dial out a pre-assigned emergency
number without seizing the CO line.
Conditions
• Emergency numbers are allowed to call even in the following cases;
• in Account Code – Verified mode
• in any toll restriction levels
• after the pre-assigned charge limit is reached
• in Electronic Station Lockout
• A maximum of eight emergency numbers are assignable.
Any number can be stored as an emergency number.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[009] Emergency Dial Number Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, Emergency call 1 through 8
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Emergency Call
End-to-End DTMF Signaling (Tone Through)
Description
DTMF signaling is required for access to special network services
offered by some telephone companies. This system allows the
proprietary telephone user to send DTMF signals to the line during
an established call.
Conditions
None
3-55
Features
3
E
Features
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Executive Busy Override – CO Line
Description
Allows a proprietary telephone user to barge into an existing
outside call either between two outside parties on the ISDN line
through the system or between an outside and an inside parties, so
as to establish a three-party conference call. It is possible for
extension users to prevent this function from being executed by
another extension user (Executive Busy Override Deny).
Conditions
• Class of Service programming determines the extension users who can
perform Executive Busy Override.
• The pre-assigned extension users can barge in any CO line even if
access to the line is not allowed by System Programming.
• This feature does not work if the extension has set Executive Busy
Override Deny or Data Line Security.
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a
confirmation tone is sent to all three parties. This tone can be
eliminated by System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Executive busy override deny set / cancel
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
[990] System Additional Information, Field (13)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Conference
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Executive Busy Override — CO Line
Features
3-56
E
3
Features
Executive Busy Override – Extension
Description
Allows the pre-assigned extension user to barge into an existing
extension call, either between two inside parties or between an
outside and an inside parties, so as to establish a three-party
conference call. It is possible for extension users to prevent this
function from being executed by another extension user (Executive
Busy Override Deny).
Conditions
• Class of Service programming determines the extension users who can
perform Executive Busy Override and Executive Busy Override Deny.
• This feature does not work if the extension has set Executive Busy
Override Deny or Data Line Security.
• When a two-party call is changed to a three-party call and vice versa, a
confirmation tone is sent to all three parties. This tone can be
eliminated by System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Executive busy override deny
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
[990] System Additional Information, Field (13)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Conference
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Executive Busy Override — Extension
Extension Connection Assignment
Description
Assign whether the extension user can perform all accesses or not.
Conditions
• The extension of the jack number 01 should be set to “connect.”
• If the destination of DIL 1:1 or DDI is set to “disconnect,” the call is
transferred to an operator.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[611] Extension Connection Assignment
Feature References
3-57
Features
None
3
E
Features
Operation Reference
Not applicable.
Extension Group
Description
The system supports eight extension groups. Any member of an
extension group can pick up a call directed to another group
member (Group Call Pickup). In addition, there are Paging –
Group, Station Hunting and Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
features.
Conditions
• Every extension should belong to an extension group but cannot belong
to more than one group.
• If System Connection* is employed, an extension group can include
extensions on both systems.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type
[602] Extension Group Assignment
Feature References
Operation References
Section 3, Features,
Call Pickup, Group
Paging – Group
Station Hunting
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Not applicable.
External Relay
Description
A pre-assigned extension can switch on the relay connected to the
system.
Conditions
• Class of Service Programming determines the extension users who can
access the relay.
• One external relay can be connected per system.
• It is possible to assign the connecting time by System Programming.
.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.8 External Relay, External Ringer and External Sensor Connection
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features
3-58
E
3
Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, External relay on
[213] External Relay Connecting Time
[512] External Relay Access
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
External Relay Access
External Ringer
Description
If a call is placed on a specified extension or a CO line, an external
bell connected to the system will ring together. Any extension can
answer the call by entering a feature number. The external ringer
can be assigned as a destination of the following feature:
a) CO Line – DIL, Direct Dialing In
b) Extension – All incoming call
c) TAFAS
Conditions
• It is assignable to enable / disable the external ringer per extension / CO
line.
• One ringer can be connected per system.
• The ringer can be assigned a floating number.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.8 External Relay, External Ringer and External Sensor Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, External ringer, External ringer answer
[418] External Ringer Assignment
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
External Ringer
3-59
Features
3
E
Features
External Sensor
Description
If a device connected to the external sensor becomes active, it is
informed to Operator 1 with the ring tone.
Display Sample: External Sensor 1
Ring Tone
←
5 sec
→
While having a conversation,
←
Conditions
1 sec →
• One external sensor can be connected per system.
• If a call is not answered within 60 seconds, it will automatically stop
ringing.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.8 External Relay, External Ringer and External Sensor Connection
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Operator Service Features,
External Sensor
EXtra Device Port (XDP)
Description
EXtra Device Port (XDP) expands the number of telephones available
in the system by allowing an extension jack to contain two
telephones. A proprietary telephone (PT) and a single line
telephone (SLT) or DSS console and SLT can be connected to the
same jack but have different extension numbers so that they can act
as completely different extensions.
Features
3-60
E
3
Conditions
Features
• XDP requires previous programming of the individual jack. Enable
XDP mode for the desired jack by System Programming. Immediately
after changing the assignment, changed setting may not work for a
maximum of eight seconds.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.5 EXtra Device Port (XDP) Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[600] EXtra Device Port
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Paralleled Telephone
Operation References
Not applicable.
Flexible Numbering
Description
3-61
Features
The numbers used for the access codes of system features and the
number used for extension numbers are not fixed. They can be set
as required provided there are not any conflicts. Feature numbers
can be from one to three digits, utilizing numbers “0 through 9” as
well as “ ” and “#.” Extension numbers can be two to four digits
in length. Any number can be set as the leading first or second
digit. If one digit is assigned as the leading digit, some extensions
have 2-digit numbers and some have 3-digit numbers. If two digits
are assigned as the leading digits, some have 3-digit numbers and
some have 4-digit numbers.
3
F
Features
Flexible Feature Numbers
Number
01
02
03 - 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Feature
1st hundred extension block
2nd hundred extension block
3rd through 16th hundred extension block
Operator call
Automatic line access
CO line group line access
System speed dialing
Station speed dialing
Station speed dialing programming
Doorphone call
Paging – external
Paging – external answer / TAFAS answer
Paging – group
Paging – group answer
Call pickup, CO line
Call pickup, group
Call pickup, directed
Call hold
Hold retrieve – intercom
Hold retrieve – CO line
Last number redial
Call park / call park retrieve
Account code entry
Door opener
reserved
Station feature clear
Message waiting
External relay on
Call forwarding / do not disturb
Call pickup deny
External ringing
Call waiting
Executive busy override deny
Pickup dialing program
Absent message
Timed reminder
Electronic station lockout
Night service mode
Parallel telephone mode
Background music – external
Paging – deny
Primary COS select
Secondary COS select
Features
Default
2
3
None
9
0
8
6
60
68
64
44
63
43
4
40
41
50
51
53
#
52
49
55
790
70
67
710
720
730
731
733
74
750
76
77
78
69
65
721
791
793
3-62
F
3
Flexible Feature Numbers
Number
57
58
59
60
61
62
63-68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
Features
Feature
UCD log–in / log–out
Operator 1 call
Operator 2 call
Automatic callback busy cancel
Emergency call 1
Emergency call 2
Emergency call 3 through 8
External ringer answer
Timed reminder, remote
Call log, incoming
Do not disturb for DDI
CLIR
COLR
Call log lock control, incoming
Live Call Screening Password
System working report printout / clear
Default
45
61
62
46
110
112
None
47
7
54
56
57
58
59
799
794
Default feature numbers are shown above.
In addition to the flexible feature numbers above, fixed feature
numbers are provided.
Fixed Feature Numbers
3-63
Features
Feature
While busy tone is heard
Automatic Callback Busy
Busy Station Signaling (BSS)
Executive Busy Override
Message Waiting
While Do Not Disturb tone is heard
Do Not Disturb Override
While calling or talking
Account Code Delimiter
Alternate Calling – Ring / Voice
Conference
Door Open
Pulse to Tone Conversion
When the set is on-hook
Day / night mode display
Time display / date display switching
Default
6
2
3
4
2
# / 99
3
5
#
#
3
F
Features
Conditions
• Flexible feature numbers can only be dialed during dial tone.
• The following are examples of feature number conflicts:
Examples: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32 and 321, etc.
• Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the
feature active. For example, to set Call Waiting, the feature number for
“Call Waiting” must be followed by “1” and to cancel it, the same
feature number should be followed by “0.”
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[100] Flexible Numbering
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Features
3-64
F
3
Features
Floating Station
Description
You can assign virtual extension numbers for resources to make
them appear to be extensions. These numbers are defined as
floating numbers (FN). The following resources can have floating
numbers:
(1) External paging instruments: used for TAFAS feature.
Two FNs are available for KX-TD816.
Four FNs are available for KX-TD1232.
These FNs can be assigned as:
a) DIL 1:1 destination
b) Intercept Routing destination
(2) External ringer: used for call reception.
One FN is available for KX-TD816.
Two FNs are available for KX-TD1232.
These FNs can be assigned as:
a) DIL 1:1 destination
b) Intercept Routing destination
(3) Modem*: used for system administration. One FN is
available.
This can be assigned as DIL 1:1 destination and also can
be used as an extension number to call the modem.
(4) UCD group: used for UCD feature. Eight FNs are
available. These FNs can be assigned as :
a) DIL 1:1 destination
b) Extension
c) Intercept Routing destination
(5) Digital Test Access: used for testing
One DTA is available.
The FN can be used as an extension.
Conditions
Floating numbers cannot be used for setting a feature such as Call
Forwarding, etc.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.8 External Relay, External Ringer and External Sensor Connection
2.3.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
2.4.7 Remote Card Installation*
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks
[813] Floating Number Assignment
3-65
Features
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3
FH
Features
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Full One-Touch Dialing
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to make a call or have access
to a system service with one button. There is no need to be offhook before pressing the button, which is required for One-Touch
Dialing. Handsfree operation is automatically provided by pressing
a One-Touch Dialing button, a DSS button, a REDIAL button or a
SAVE button.
Conditions
• It is necessary to program automatic handsfree dial mode.
• This feature is also available with DSS buttons on a DSS Console.
• This feature is also available with the large display operation of KXT7235 (Special Features for KX-T7235).
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Full One-Touch Dialing
Handset / Headset Selection
Description
The system supports the use of a user-supplied headset on a
proprietary telephone(PT).
Conditions
To set headset mode on a PT, use Station Programming.
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Handset / Headset Selection
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Features
3-66
H
3
Features
Handsfree Answerback
Description
Allows the speakerphone telephone user to talk to a caller without
lifting the handset, if the user has set handsfree answerback mode.
If the user receives an intercom call in the mode, handsfree
conversation is established immediately after the user hears beep
tone and the caller hears confirmation tone.
Conditions
• Handsfree answerback mode is set or cancelled by pressing the AUTO
ANSWER button.
• This feature does not work for calls from outside parties or doorphone
calls.
• Handsfree Answerback set on a telephone overrides the Ring / Voice
Intercom Alerting mode preset on the telephone; Handsfree
conversation mode is established as soon as confirmation tone is sent.
Programming Reference
No programming required.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Alternate Calling – Ring / Voice
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Handsfree Answerback
Handsfree Operation
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to dial and to talk to the
other party without lifting the handset. Pressing an appropriate
button provides handsfree mode.
Conditions
• This function can be utilized by pressing a button listed below when
the SP-PHONE/MONITOR button indicator is off:
SP-PHONE button; MONITOR button; INTERCOM button;
CO button
• A single press of a One-Touch Button, DSS button, REDIAL button or
a SAVE button also provides handsfree mode if Full One-Touch
Dialing is enabled.
• The KX-T7250 can be used for handsfree dialing operations, etc., but
cannot be used for handsfree conversation.
Programming References
No programming required.
3-67
Features
3
H
Features
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Full One-Touch Dialing
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Handsfree Operation
Hold Recall
Description
Prevents a call on hold from being kept waiting longer than a predetermined time. If the timer expires, ringing or an alarm tone is
generated as a reminder to the user who held the call. If the user is
on-hook and its speaker-phone is off, the phone is rung. If the user
is off-hook or in speakerphone mode when the timer expires an
alarm tone is sent from the built-in speaker of a proprietary
telephone (PT) or from the handset receiver of a single line
telephone at 15-second intervals.
Conditions
• It is required to enable the Call Waiting Tone beforehand.
• Hold Recall can be disabled by System Programming.
• The display PT flashes the indication of the held party for five seconds
at 15-second intervals synchronized with the tone.
• Alarm tone is sent as follows:
15 s
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
Feature References
Operation References
Section 3, Features,
Call Hold – CO Line
Call Hold – Intercom
Call Waiting
Call Hold, Exclusive – CO line
Call Hold, Exclusive –Intercom
Not applicable.
Host PBX Access
Description
The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is
performed by connecting a line from the host to a CO line in the
Digital Super Hybrid System.
Features
3-68
H
3
Conditions
Features
• To enable Host PBX Access, put the host PBX line in a CO line group.
The user accesses the host PBX by selecting that CO line.
• A Host PBX Access Code is required to access CO lines of the host
PBX.
• A pause, if programmed, can be inserted between the user-dialed Host
PBX Access Code and the following digits (Automatic Pause Insertion).
Program the pause time required by the Host PBX for that CO line
group.
• Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible (External
Feature Access).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[411] Host PBX Access Codes
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
HOTEL APPLICATION
Description
Allows the operator to handle the front/operator services such as
check-in / check-out, timed reminder (wake-up call) and room
management. This operation is applicable to only the operator extension
with the KX-T7235.
Check-In / Check-Out
Description
Allows the operator to operate the check-in / check-out service.
This feature can control the usage of an outside call by switching
the Class of Service between primary and secondary, and count and
print out the telephone charge and the other charges such as minibar.
Conditions
• It is required to enable the hotel application by System Programming.
• When the check-in is assigned, the Class of Service is set to the primary
one and the charge counter will be cleared. When the check-out is
assigned, the Class of Service is set to secondary one and the total
telephone charge and the other charge will be displayed and printed out.
• The telephone charge can be added the surcharge according to the preassigned margin rate. The pre-assigned tax rate can be also added.
3-69
Features
3
H
Features
• If the operator uses the paired DSS console, the operator can refer the
check-in status on DSS console.
• It is possible to give a header to the printed bill such as hotel's name or
greeting or to assign the starting location of output data with a personal
computer.
• It is possible to limit the telephone usage on a pre-assigned amount by
System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[010] Budget Management
[011] Charge Margin and Tax Rate
[123] Hotel Application
[990] System Additional Information, Field (40)
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 4, Features,
Budget Management
Charge Fee Reference
Operator Service Features,
Hotel Application
Room Management
Description
Allows the extension user to print out the information of a guest
room (e.g. cleaning status of the room and the total of the minibar
charge) with a telephone in each room. The absent messages No.6No.9 can be printed out.
Conditions
None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[008] Absent Messages
[990] System Additional Information, Field (41)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Absent Message Capability
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Hotel Application
Features
3-70
I
3
Features
Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)
Description
Allows the operator to set, cancel and confirm the wake-up call
remotely for the extension.
Conditions
• When either an operator or the extension sets a new time, the pre-set
time is cleared.
• When a wake-up call is not answered, the operator's Alert indicator
(KX-T7235 only) will flash.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Timed reminder, remote
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Alert Button
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Timed Reminder
Operation References
—User Manual
Operator Service Features,
Hotel Application
Intercept Routing
Description
Provides automatic redirection of incoming outside calls. There
are two types of Intercept Routing. In the first case a call cannot
be placed on the called party. This is called Rerouting. In the
second case the call is not answered within a programmed time
period. This is called Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA).
Conditions
• Intercept Routing applies to DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N, TAFAS, Call
Forwarding, and Station Hunting.
• The final destination of intercepted calls must be programmed for day
and for night modes. There are four possible destinations:
1) an extension
2) an external pager
3) UCD group
4) an external ringer
• If the destination is in Do Not Disturb, the call is redirected to operator.
3-71
Features
3
I
Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[203] Intercept Time
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Intercom Calling
Description
Allows the extension user to call another extension user within the
system.
Conditions
• Extension numbers are assigned to all extensions by System
Programming. An extension number is programmed to be two, three,
or four digits. The ISDN extension number is programmed to be one,
two or three digits.
• Names can be given to extension numbers by System Programming.
An extension number and a name, if programmed, is shown on the
display PT during an intercom call.
• DSS buttons permit one-touch access to an extension and provide Busy
Lamp Field.
• KX-T7235 user can make an extension call with an extension dialing
directory on the display.
• After dialing an extension number, the user will hear one of the
following:
Ringback tone: indicates that the other extension is being called.
Confirmation tone: indicates that the user can perform Voice
Calling.
Busy tone: indicates that the other extension is busy.
Do Not Disturb tone: indicates that the other extension has
DND assigned.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – DSS Button
Features
3-72
I
3
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Button, Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Intercom Calling
Features
ISDN Extension
Description
The system supports terminal equipments with separate power
supplies. For example, ISDN telephone, G4 Facsimile and
personal computers which are connected to optional ISDN S0 Line
Unit or Card: KX-TD280, KX-TD281 or KX-TD282. A maximum
of eight terminal equipments can be connected to each ISDN S0
bus with point-to-multi-point configuration. Terminal equipments
can be addressed individually with Multiple Subscriber Numbers
(MSN). The MSN consists of the ISDN extension number and an
additional digit, 0 through 9. If MSN is not assigned, all
equipments on the same S0 bus are called simultaneously.
The following bearer capabilities can be supported:
Transfer Capability
Transfer Mode
Circuit
Unrestricted digital
Speech
3.1 kHz Audio
The functions of terminal equipment are similar to single line
telephone functions except for the following features:
• Automatic Callback Busy
• Conference
• Call Forwarding
• Do Not Disturb
• Call Hold
• Log-In / Log-Out
• Call Park
• Message Waiting
• Call Pickup
• Paging – Group Answer
• Call Transfer
• Pickup Dialing
• Call Waiting
• Timed Reminder
Conditions
• Class of Service and department code for ISDN port apply to all
terminal equipments on the same S0 bus.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation
2.4.2 ISDN S0 Line Connection
3-73
Features
3
L
Features
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[014] Budget Management on ISDN Port
[422] ISDN Port Type
[423] ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
[424] ISDN Configuration
[425] ISDN Data Link Mode
[426] ISDN TEI Mode
[427] ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number
[428] ISDN Extension Progress Tone
[613] ISDN Class of Service
[614] Department Codes of ISDN Port
[615-616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment – Day/Night for
ISDN Extension
• The possible parameter combinations are listed below. The underlined
selections are recommended. The selections marked "*" are activated,
regardless of the assignments.
Program
[422] ISDN [423] ISDN [424] ISDN [425] ISDN
Port Type Layer 1 Active Configuration Data Link
Mode
Mode
Permanent
Point
Permanent
Fix/
Automatic
—
Multipoint
—
—
Call/
Permanent
Point
Call/
Parmanent
Fix*
Call/
Permanent
Multipoint
Call*
Automatic*
CO
Parameter
Extension
[426] ISDN
TEI Mode
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
ISDN Telephone Features
LED Indication, CO Line
Description
The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicators of the buttons
associated with CO lines tell the line conditions with a variety of
lighting patterns. This allows the user to determine which lines are
idle and which lines are in use. The table below shows the lighting
patterns and line conditions according to the CO button type.
Features
3-74
L
3
LED Indicator
Off
Green On
Green slow flash
Green moderate flash
Green rapid flash
Red On
Red slow flash
Features
CO Line Status
Idle
I-use
I-hold
I-Exclusive Hold / Outside-to-outside call
/ Unattended Conference
Hold Recall / Incoming call
Other-use
Other-hold
Flashing light (winks) patterns
Slow flash
Moderate flash
Rapid flash
1s
Conditions
Red slow flash indication appears on the S-CO button only.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
Operation References
3-75
Features
Section 3, Features,
Button, Group-CO (G-CO)
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Not applicable.
Button, Single-CO (S-CO)
3
L
Features
LED Indication, Intercom
Description
The LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicator of the INTERCOM
button indicates the line condition with a variety of lighting
patterns. This allows the user to see the current state of the
intercom line. The table below shows the lighting patterns and the
intercom line conditions.
INTERCOM Button
Off
Green On
Green slow flash
Green moderate flash
Green rapid flash
Conditions
Intercom Status
Idle
Intercom call / Conference established
Intercom call hold
Intercom call exclusive hold /
Consultation hold
Incoming intercom / Doorphone call
None
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Busy Lamp Field
Operation References
Not applicable.
Line Access, Automatic
Description
Allows the extension user to dial the automatic line access number
and access an idle line from the CO line groups assigned for the
extension. The proprietary telephone user can use the Loop-CO
button in place of the access number.
Conditions
• Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines
available to access.
• An idle CO line is selected from the CO line groups assigned to the
station. If one CO line group is available, an idle line is selected from
that group. If multiple CO line groups are available, the CO line group
hunting sequence is determined by System Programming.
• This feature requires a CO button (G-CO, L-CO or S-CO) assignment
on a proprietary telephone (PT). Dialing the line access code selects a
CO button on a PT according to the priority:
S-CO > G-CO > L-CO on a hunted CO line group
Features
3-76
L
3
Features
• If Idle Line Preference – Outgoing is set on the telephone, the user can
access an idle line only by going off-hook.
• The system waits for a programmed time before dialing after a CO line
is seized.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Automatic line access
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Outward Dialing – Line Access, Automatic
Line Access, CO Line Group
Description
Allows the extension user to dial access a CO line group. An idle
line is selected from the CO line group. To specify a CO line
group, dial the feature number (the default setting is “8”) and a
desired CO line group number (1 through 8). A proprietary
telephone user can also specify a CO line group by pressing a
Group-CO button.
Conditions
• Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines
available to access.
• An idle line is selected in sequence from the lines in the specified CO
line group.
• Group-CO buttons must be programmed prior to use.
• If Idle Line Preference – Outgoing is set on the telephone, the user can
access an idle line only by going off-hook.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, CO line group line access
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button
3-77
Features
3
L
Features
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Button, Group-CO (G-CO)
CO Line Connection
Assignment – Outgoing
CO Line Group
PT Features, SLT Features;
Outward Dialing – Line Access, CO Line Group
Line Access, Direct
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to select a CO line by
pressing an idle CO button, which automatically establishes
handsfree operation mode and allows the user to perform On-Hook
Dialing. The user need not press the SP-PHONE button,
MONITOR button nor lift the handset.
Conditions
• There are three types of CO buttons which can be programmed on an
extension: Single-CO button, Group-CO button, and Loop-CO button.
• Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines
available to access.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button, Loop-CO (LCO) Button, Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Button, Group-CO (G-CO)
Button, Loop-CO (L-CO)
Button, Single-CO (S-CO)
CO Line Connection Assignment
– Outgoing
PT Features,
Outward Dialing – Line Access, Automatic, Line Access, CO Line
Group, Line Access, Individual
Features
3-78
L
3
Features
Line Access, Individual
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user one-button access to a CO
line without having to dial a line access code.
Conditions
• Each extension is subject to System Programming items for CO lines
available to access.
• This feature requires a Single-CO (S-CO) button assignment on a
proprietary telephone.
• The system waits for a programmed time before dialing after a CO line
is seized.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Button, Single-CO (S-CO)
CO Line Connection
Assignment – Outgoing
PT Features,
Outward Dialing – Line Access, Individual
Line Preference – Incoming (No Line / Prime Line / Ringing Line)
Description
3-79
Features
A proprietary telephone user can select the method used to answer
incoming calls from the following three line preferences:
(1) No Line Preference
No line is selected when you go off-hook. You must select
a line to answer.
(2) Prime Line Preference
You can assign a prime line beforehand and answer a call
on that line, when multiple calls are received
simultaneously.
(3) Ringing Line Preference
When you go off-hook, you answer the call ringing at your
telephone.
3
L
Features
Conditions
• Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting.
• If Prime Line Preference is selected and an incoming call arrives from a
line other than the prime line, it cannot be answered just by going offhook. The Prime Line should be assigned to the Single CO button.
• If Ringing Line Preference is selected, going off-hook does not answer
a line programmed for “no ring” even though there is an incoming call.
Going off-hook during the delay time does not answer a line
programmed for “delayed ringing.”
• A single line telephone is always set to Ringing Line Preference and
cannot be changed.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Basic Operation,
Receiving Calls
Line Preference – Outgoing (Idle Line / No Line / Prime Line)
Description
A proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line
preference to originate calls from the following three line
preferences:
(1) Idle Line Preference:
When you go off-hook, you are connected to an idle line.
An idle line is automatically selected from the pre-assigned
lines.
(2) No Line Preference:
No line is selected when you go off-hook. You must select
a line to make a call.
(3) Prime Line Preference:
When you go off-hook, you are connected to the preassigned line. Assign a line as your prime line beforehand.
Conditions
• Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting.
• To set Prime Line Preference, one prime line is selected from intercom
or CO lines.
• The CO lines used by users must be connected by programming.
• To select Idle Line Preference, CO lines available for the user should be
programmed. Also CO lines available for Automatic Line Access
should be assigned.
Features
3-80
L
3
Features
• The user can override the Idle / Prime Line Preference temporarily to
select a specific line. To select it, press the desired line access button
(INTERCOM or CO button) before going off-hook or pressing the SPPHONE/MONITOR button; or if Full One-Touch Dialing is enabled,
press One-Touch Dialing, DSS, REDIAL or SAVE button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[103] Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual
Flexible Button Assignment – Group-CO (G-CO) Button, Loop-CO (LCO) Button, Single-CO (S-CO) Button
Preferred Line Assignment – Outgoin
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing
Operation References
—User Manual
Basic Operation,
Making Calls
Live Call Screening (LCS)†
Description
Allows a proprietary telephone user to monitor their voice mailbox
while incoming callers are leaving a message and, if desired,
intercept the call. The voice mailbox can be monitored in one of
two ways — Hands-free or Private.
Hands-free Mode
The voice mailbox is monitored through the built-in speaker
of the proprietary telephone.
Private Mode
The proprietary telephone sounds an alert tone when callers
are connected to the voice mailbox. To monitor the call, the
user goes off hook on the handset or speakerphone.
1s
Alert Tone
To intercept the call in either Hands-Free or Private mode, press the
LCS button.
3-81
Features
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
3
L
Features
A single line telephone, which is connected with a proprietary
telephone in parallel, can be also used to monitor a recording
message. Be sure that the Live Call Screening on the connected
proprietary telephone has been activated.
This feature is useful when you are out with a portable handset of a
cordless telephone (SLT). The handset sounds an alert tone to let
you know that a message is being recorded. To intercept the call,
flash the hooking.
Conditions
• When the extension user is having a conversation, a call waiting tone is
sent. The user can put an existing call on hold before accessing LCS.
• A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Live Call Screening
button.
• To prevent unauthorized monitoring, a three-digit password must be set
by the LCS user. If the user forgets his password, it can be cleared by
Operator 1.
• Each extension can be programmed to either close the mailbox or keep
recording the conversation after the call is intercepted.
Programming References
System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[617] Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment
Station Programming,
Live Call Screening Mode Selection
Flexible Button Assignment — Live Call Screening Button
Live Call Screening Cancel Button
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Lockout
Description
If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, they are both
disconnected from the speech path automatically. This feature
applies to extension and outside calls. Reorder tone is sent to the
off-hook party after it is disconnected.
Conditions
None
Programming References
No programming required.
Features
3-82
LM
3
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Lockout
Features
Log-In / Log-Out
Description
Assigns an extension to join (log-in) or leave (log-out) a hunting
group. Extensions in log-out status receive no calls by Station
Hunting but can receive other calls, unlike the DND feature.
Conditions
• There should be at least one extension that is in log-in status. Only one
log-in extension cannot be set in log-out status.
lighting
pattern
Red on
Red flash
off
CO Line Status
UCD
Station Hunting
Log-Out
Log-Out
Log-In (plural reception)
Log-In (no reception)
Log-In (no reception)
The lighting patterns of Log-In/Log-Out button and the status are shown
below.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, UCD log-in / log-out
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Log-In / Log-Out Button
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Station Hunting
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
PT Features, SLT Features
Log-In / Log-Out
Manager Extension
Description
One extension in the system can be assigned as the system
manager. This extension can perform System Programming.
Conditions
• Besides the manager extension, the extension that is connected to the
jack 1 is able to perform System Programming.
• If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the manager extension, the
proprietary telephone user is regarded as the manager.
3-83
Features
3
M
Features
• Manager extension can print out and clear the system working report.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
[100] Flexible Numbering, System working report printout / clear
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Message Waiting
Description
The system supports the ability to inform the called party of a
message waiting. The user, with a MESSAGE button, knows there
is a message if the LED of the MESSAGE button is lit red. Even if
the button is not provided nor assigned, the called party hears
special dial tone, when he / she goes off-hook. Pressing the lit
MESSAGE button also means to call back the extension that left
the message or listen to the messages which are stored in the
mailbox of the Voice Processing System.
Conditions
• For the proprietary telephone which is provided with no MESSAGE
button, a flexible CO button can be assigned as the MESSAGE button
either by System or Station Programming.
• Canceling the message can be performed from the extension setting it
or from the extension receiving it.
• The system supports a maximum of 128 simultaneous messages.
• Messages are always left on the original extension. It is not sent to a
Call Forwarding or Station Hunting destination.
• A single line telephone user will hear the ring tone as a notification, if
he / she receives a message. It is programmable to set the interval of a
ring tone by System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Message
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
[990] System Additional Information Fields (9), (38)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Message Waiting (MESSAGE) Button
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Dial Tone, Distinctive
Voice Mail Integration
Features
3-84
M
3
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Message Waiting
Features
Voice Mail Integration
Microphone Mute
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone,
for privacy reasons.
Conditions
• This is effective for the microphone only; your voice will only be
muted during a handsfree conversation.
• The user can hear the other party’s voice during Microphone Mute.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Microphone Mute
Mixed Station Capacities
Description
This system supports a wide range of telephone sets, not only
Proprietary Telephone (PT) in the Digital Super Hybrid System,
but also single line rotary telephones (employing dial pulse signals)
and single line push-button dialing telephones (touch tone). The
super hybrid method used in this system allows any telephone to be
connected to an extension modular jack without an adaptor.
Conditions
• If a telephone is replaced by another one, the stored data (such as
feature button storage) is held for the new one.
• It is possible to ignore the pulse dial by System Programming.
In this case, a single line rotary telephone does not function.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.2 Extension Connection
2.4.3 Extension Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[121] Pulse Dial Reception Assignment
3-85
Features
3
M
Features
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Module Expansion
Description
The KX-TD816 starts with 8 extension jacks.
The KX-TD1232 starts with 16 extension jacks. It can be expanded
by installing optional card and units.
• Extension line unit: Adds 8 extension jacks.
• ISDN S0 line card : KX-TD816 – Adds 2 ISDN S0 lines.
KX-TD1232 – Adds 4 ISDN S0 lines.
• ISDN S0 line unit : Adds 2 ISDN S0 lines.
The KX-TD816 can have a maximum of one extension unit, one
ISDN S0 line card and one ISDN S0 unit.
The KX-TD1232 can have a maximum of two extension units, one
ISDN S0 line card and one ISDN S0 unit.
Conditions
• The number of extension jacks may be different from the number of
telephones if the eXtra Device Port feature is enabled. This feature
allows one extension jack to have two telephones.
• When an optional card and / or unit is installed, the card and / or unit
identification is set by System Programming.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.4.2 ISDN S0 Line Connection (Optional Card)
2.4.4 ISDN S0 Line Connection (Optional Unit)
2.4.5 Extension Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[109] Expansion Card / Unit Type
Feature References
Operation References
Section 3, Features,
EXtra Device Port (XDP)
Paralleled Telephone
Not applicable.
Features
3-86
M
3
Features
Multilingual
Description
Assigns the language displayed on proprietary telephones and
printed out to SMDR.
Conditions
• You can select from German, English or French when you are in the
Station Programming mode or when in normal use.
• You can select from German or English when you are in the System
Programming mode or when you print out the data to SMDR.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[101] Language Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Field (35)
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Music on Hold
Description
While a party is on hold, music is automatically sent.
Conditions
• Operations such as Call Hold, or Exclusive Call Hold generates Music
on Hold. In case of Call Transfer, it is possible to assign either Music
or ringback tone is generated.
• The music source is used for Music on Hold and / or BGM. Select a
music source for each usage.
• The system has an internal music source. However it may be necessary
to connect a user-supplied external music source such as a radio to the
system. Up to two music sources can be connected per system. It is
required to select the internal or external music source by System
Programming.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.10 External Music Source Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[803] Music Source Use
[990] System Additional Information, Fields, (1) and (20)
Feature References
3-87
Features
Section 3, Features,
Background Music (BGM)
3
N
Features
Operation References
Not applicable.
Night Service
Description
This supports both Night and Day modes of operation. The system
operation for originating and receiving calls can be different for day
and night modes. The system operation for restricting toll calls can
be arranged separately to prevent unauthorized toll calls at night.
Switching of the Day / Night Mode
Day / Night mode can be switched either automatically at a preassigned time or manually by pre-assigned extension or Operator at
any time desired.
Class of Service programming determines the extensions that can
perform it.
Automatic Night Service: If you set automatic switching
mode, your system will switch the Day / Night mode at the
programmed time each day. The starting time of the Day /
Night mode can be set for each day.
Manual Night Service: Operator and the pre-assigned
extension can switch the Day / Night mode manually.
Conditions
• The following programming items may be assigned in a different way
between day mode and night mode:
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
— Day / Night
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
— Day / Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment
— Day / Night
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
• After switching the service mode manually in Automatic mode the
Automatic mode will be changed to the Manual mode.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Night service mode
[102] Day / Night Service Starting Time
[513] Night Service Access
Features
3-88
N
NO
3
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Night Service
Special Display Features,
Night Service
Features
Notebook Function
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to store the phone number in
the memory during conversation on the phone or on-hook status.
The stored number is dialed automatically with simple operation.
Conditions
• The outside line, which was connected when the user stored the number
is selected when re-dialing the number. If the line is busy, the busy tone
is sent.
• The pause, if programmed, can be inserted between the CO line access
number and the following phone number (Automatic Pause Insertion).
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Notebook Function
Off-Hook Monitor
Description
Allows the speaker-phone proprietary telephone user to let the other
users listen to the conversation through the built-in speaker, when
the existing call keep using the handset.
Conditions
• This feature is not available for the KX-T7250.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Off-Hook Monitor
3-89
Features
3
O
Features
One-Touch Dialing
Description
One-Touch Dialing offers the proprietary telephone (PT) user onetouch access to a desired party or system feature. This is enabled
by storing a telephone number or a feature number of up to 16digits on a One-Touch Dialing button. The number of buttons
available depends on the type of PT. One-Touch Dialing buttons
can be programmed to flexible buttons: CO, DSS or PF
(Programmable Feature).
Conditions
• It is possible to store an account code into a One-Touch Dialing button.
• Speed Dialing, One-Touch Dialing, manual dialing, Last Number
Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used together.
• It is possible to store a number consisting of 17 digits or more by
dividing it and storing it in two One-Touch Dialing buttons. In this
case, a line access code should not be stored on the second button.
• If the Full One-Touch Dialing is enabled, there is no need to go offhook, before pressing the One-Touch Button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – One-Touch Dialing Button
Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
DSS Console Features ......................................................User Manual,
PF (Programmable Feature) Buttons – One-Touch Dialing
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Full One-Touch Dialing
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
One-Touch Dialing
DSS Console Features,
One-Touch Dialing
One-Touch Access for System Features
One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Description
This feature, if programmed, allows the DSS Console and the
proprietary telephone user to hold an outside call and quickly
transfer it to an extension. While talking to an outside party,
pressing a DSS button on the console or the proprietary telephone
provides automatic hold and transfer. There is no need to press the
Features
3-90
O
3
Features
TRANSFER button. The extension starts ringing immediately.
Conditions
• One-Touch Transfer cannot be performed when there is another call on
Consultation Hold.
• If One-Touch Transfer mode is disabled, the user transfers an outside
call by pressing the TRANSFER button followed by the DSS button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[108] One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Button, Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Call Transfer — to Extension
DSS Console Features,
Call Transfer
Operator
Description
The system supports up to two operators during day and night
modes separately. Any extension can be appointed as an operator.
The extension assigned as Operator has the ability to perform the
following operations:
• Performing the Hotel Application
• Printing / clearing the System Working Report
• Setting / clearing the Remote Station Lock
• Switching the Class of Service – primary / secondary
• Switching the Day / Night mode manually
• Turning on / off the external background music
Only Operator 1 has the ability to perform the following operations:
• Setting the Automatic Overflow
• Setting / cancelling the Incoming Call Log Lock
• Setting the Hurry-Up Transfer
• Receiving the Alert Indication
• Receiving an alarm tone from the external sensor
• Receiving the call which is transferred from DND extension
Conditions
3-91
Features
• If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the operator’s extension, the
proprietary telephone user is regarded as the operator.
• The operator can be assigned as a destination of the Transfer Recall by
System Programming.
3
O
Features
• The Direct Dialing In call which is denied to receive by the extension or
is dialed improper number is forwarded to the operator.
• The Alert Indication is only available for the operator 1 in Day mode.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
[100] Flexible Numbering, Night service mode, Background music –
external, Primary COS select, Secondary COS select, Timed
reminder remote, Call log lock control, incoming, System working
report printout / clear
[120] Operator Queue
[990] System Additional Information, Field (11)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Hurry-UP Button, Voice Mail (VM)
Transfer Button
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Operator Service Features
Operator Call
Description
Allows the extension user to call an operator extension by dialing
the feature number, if at least one operator is assigned. There can
be one or two extensions assigned as Operator 1 and 2.
When an operator call (default: 9) is made, the call is connected to
Operator 1. If the Operator 1’s line is busy, the call is connected to
Operator 2.
Conditions
None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
[100] Flexible Numbering, Operator call, Operator 1 call, Operator 2 call
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Operator Call
Features
3-92
P
3
Features
PAGING FEATURES – SUMMARY
Description
Paging allows you to make a voice announcement to multiple
persons at the same time. Your message is announced over the
built-in speakers of proprietary telephones and / or external
speakers (external pagers). The paged person can answer your page
from a nearby telephone. Making and answering a page is possible
from either a proprietary or single line telephone. You can do
paging with a call on hold in order to transfer the call (Paging and
Transfer). It is also possible to deny the page.
Paging features are classified as follows:
Paging – All
Paging – External
Paging – Group
Paging – All
Description
Allows you to make a voice announcement from the speakers of the
proprietary telephones and from the external paging devices
(external pagers). If one of the paged persons answers your paging,
you can talk to the person through the connected line.
Conditions
• If System Connection* is established, paging is performed to all
proprietary telephones and all external paging devices in both systems.
• The confirmation tone is sent to extensions, when the paging is made or
answered. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• The confirmation tone is sent from external pagers, before the voice
announcement. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
• The ringing or busy extension cannot receive a page.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external, Paging – external answer /
TAFAS answer, Paging – group, Paging – group answer, Paging –
deny
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
3-93
Features
None
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3
P
Features
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Paging — All
Paging — DENY
Paging — ANSWER
Paging and Transfer
Paging – External
Description
Allows you to make a voice announcement using external paging
devices (external pagers). Up to two pagers can be contained per
system. It is possible to select one or two pagers to perform your
paging. Any telephone user can answer your Paging – External.
Conditions
• Previous connection of an external pager is required.
• External pagers can be used for TAFAS, Paging – External , or
Background Music (BGM) – External in this order. For example, if
Paging – External is overridden by TAFAS, reorder tone is returned to
the performer of the Paging – External. If BGM is overridden by
another higher priority, it is interrupted and starts again when the higher
priority is finished.
• The confirmation tone is sent to the extensions and external pager,
when the paging is made or answered. Eliminating the tone is
programmable.
• The confirmation tone is sent from external pagers before the voice
announcement. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external, Paging – external answer /
TAFAS answer, Paging – deny
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Paging — All
Paging — DENY
Paging — ANSWER
Paging and Transfer
Features
3-94
P
3
Features
Paging – Group
Description
Allows you to select an extension group and make a voice
announcement. All the proprietary telephones in the group will
receive the page. If a member of the paged group answers your
paging, you can talk to the person through the connected line.
Conditions
• To select all groups pages all extensions.
• Confirmation tone is sent when the page is made or answered.
Eliminating the tone is programmable.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – group, Paging – group answer,
Paging - deny
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Extension Group
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Paging — Group
Paging — DENY
Paging — ANSWER
Paging and Transfer
Paralleled Telephone
Description
Proprietary telephone device can be connected in parallel with a
single line telephone (SLT).
When a parallel connection is made, an extension user can make
and answer a call using either telephone.
Conditions
• The proprietary telephone (PT) can be used to perform normal
operations whether or not the SLT is enabled.
• If one telephone goes off-hook while the other telephone is on a call,
the call is switched to the former.
• When receiving a call;
The SLT is enabled; Both the PT and the SLT ring except when the PT
is in Handsfree Answerback mode or Voice Alerting mode.
The SLT is disabled; PT rings but the SLT does not ring. However the
SLT can answer the phone.
• When the SLT is in operation, the display and LED indicator on the
paired PT will show in the same way as if the PT is in operation.
• If eXtra Device Port feature is available, each telephone can act as
completely different extension.
3-95
Features
3
P
Features
• Call Waiting tone can be heard only PT.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.4 Paralleled Telephone Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Parallel telephone mode
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
EXtra Device Port (XDP)
Operation References
—User manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Paralleled Telephone Connection
Pickup Dialing
Description
Allows an extension user to make an outgoing call by going offhook, if the user has previously stored the telephone number. This
feature is also known as Hot Line.
Conditions
• A rotary dial telephone without the “#” button cannot program this
feature. For programming the phone number, replace a rotary dial
telephone to the telephone with the “#” button temporarily.
• The user uses a feature number to enable or disable pickup dialing.
• If the feature is enabled and the user goes off-hook, dial tone is
generated for the waiting time and then dialing starts. During the
waiting time the user can dial another party, overriding the Pickup
Dialing function.
• If the user answers an incoming call or retrieves a call on hold, the
Pickup Dialing feature does not work.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Pickup dialing program set / cancel
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Pickup Dialing (Hot Line)
Features
3-96
P
3
Features
Power Failure Restart
Description
Returning on electricity, the system restarts the stored data
automatically. Before restarting, the system records the error logs
if necessary.
Conditions
• If System Connection* is established, the Slave system makes a copy of
the restored data of the Master system.
• In the event of a power failure, system memory is protected by the
factory-provided lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the
memories of Camp-On and Call Park. However if the system finds the
wrong system data, the indication “Memory data loss” is displayed on
the display proprietary telephone of Operator 1.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Predial
Description
Allows the display proprietary telephone user to check and correct
the dialed number in on-hook state before going off-hook. When
going off-hook, making a call is initiated.
Conditions
• This feature is available during stand-by state only.
• A line access number is always required to make an outgoing outside
call.
• Making a call is performed at the time the handset is lifted up or the CO
or SP-PHONE button is pressed.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Predial Preparation
3-97
Features
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3
P
Features
Privacy, Automatic
Description
By default all conversations established on CO lines, extension
lines, and doorphone lines have privacy enabled.
Conditions
Automatic privacy may be temporarily released for a three-party
conference, which is established by Executive Busy Override.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
Operation References
Section 3, Features,
Executive Busy Override – CO
Line
Not applicable.
Executive Busy Override –
Extension
Private Call
Description
Allows the user to exclude private calls from the SMDR printout.
When making a private call, if the user enters the pre-set account
code, the dialed number is not included in the SMDR printout.
Conditions
• It is required to program the account code for private calls in program
[105] “Account Code.” The location 01 of the entries is used as the
account code for this feature.
• To prevent private calls, clear the entry above.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[105] Account Codes
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Change Fee Reference – Charge Account Code Set
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Account Code Entry
Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR)
PT Features, SLT Features;
Account Code Entry
Features
3-98
R
3
Features
Redial, Automatic
Description
This is a special feature for the proprietary telephones, that
provides automatic redialing of the last dialed, saved number or call
log, if the called party is busy. If the Last Number Redial, Saved
Number Redial, Call Log operation or Notebook function is
performed handsfree, the telephone set will hang up and try again
after a pre-determined period of time.
Conditions
• Redial Repeat Time and Interval Time can be changed by System
Programming.
• Pressing Terminate button allows the system to cancel this feature.
• If any dialing operation is done during Automatic Redial, this function
is finished.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
3-99
Features
Section 3, Features,
Call Log, Incoming
Notebook Function
Redial, Saved Number
PT Features,
Redial, Automatic
Redial, Last Number
Special Features for KX-T7235
– Call Log, Outgoing
R
3
Features
Redial, Last Number
Description
Every telephone in the system automatically saves the last
telephone number dialed to a CO line and allows the extension user
to dial the same number again.
Conditions
• With a proprietary telephone, REDIAL button is used to carry out Last
Number Redial. With a single line telephone, the feature number is
used.
• The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least
one digit to be sent to a CO line is dialed. Dialing a CO line access
code alone does not change the memorized number.
• Proprietary telephones allows multiple redialing automatically
(Automatic Redial).
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Last number redial
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Redial, Automatic
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Redial, Last Number
Redial, Saved Number
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to save a telephone number
and redial the number afterwards. The user can store it while in
conversation on a CO line. The saved number can be redialed
many times until another one is stored.
Conditions
• Proprietary telephones (PT) allow automatic multiple redialing
(Automatic Redial).
• If the SAVE button is not provided on your PT, it is possible to assign a
flexible button to be the SAVE button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – SAVE Button
3-100
Features
3
R
Features
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Redial, Automatic
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Redial, Saved Number
Remote Station Lock Control
Description
Operator is given the privilege of controlling Electronic Station
Lockout on any station.
Conditions
The new setting is superior to the old one. If Station Lockout has already
been set by the extension user and Remote Station Lock is set by
Operator, canceling the lock is only possible by Operator.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Electronic Station Lockout
Operation References
—User Manual
Operator Service Features,
Remote Station Lock Control
Ringing, Delayed
Description
If Direct In Lines (DIL) 1:N is established, a telephone set is
originally set to ring instantly. This setting can be changed to
delayed ringing, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) on a CO
line basis.
Conditions
• This feature does not apply to DIL 1:1 calls.
• If delayed, no ringing or no incoming call (disable) is assigned to an
extension, the extension can answer an incoming call during no ring or
the delay time by pressing the flashing button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Direct In Lines (DIL)
Features
3-101
R
3
Operation References
Features
Not applicable.
Ringing, Discriminating
Description
Allows the extension user to identify the incoming call by the
ringing pattern. (See Section 5.1 “Tone / Ring Tone.”)
Conditions
• When there are multiple incoming calls and the extension goes from
off-hook to on-hook, the calls are rung according to the following
priority:
<1> Consultation Hold Recall
<2> An incoming call from a line in which the Prime Line
Preference – Incoming function has been set (with a
proprietary telephone only)
<3> Call Waiting
<4> Incoming calls; Hold Recall; Transfer Recall; Unattended
Conference Recall
• If multiple incoming calls arrive at an on-hook extension
simultaneously, priority as to which calls should be rung is generally on
a “first-come first-served” basis. In the case of proprietary telephones
(PT), however, when the Prime Line Preference – Incoming function
has been set, this line takes precedence.
• Incoming TAFAS calls can be identified by ringing signals sent out
from external pagers or ringer. The ringing pattern is the same as the
outside calls.
• The PT user can select a desired tone frequency for each CO button.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Operation References
Not applicable.
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Description
3-102
Features
Allows the proprietary telephone user to select the desired ringer
frequency for each CO button. This provides discrimination of
incoming outside calls.
3
S
Features
Conditions
There are eight ringer frequencies available. One of them can be assigned
to a CO button that is assigned as each of the following buttons: SingleCO, Group-CO, or Loop-CO button. It is not possible to assign a ringer
frequency to any other button.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Secret Dialing
Description
Allows an extension user to conceal all or part of a registered
telephone number that normally appears on the display during
System Speed Dialing or One-Touch Dialing. Numbers can be
assigned to Programmable Feature buttons on PT and DSS
Console. When a display telephone user makes a call to the
telephone number that is set to Secret Dialing, all or part of the
number does not appear on the display. Additionally, KX-T7235
are capable of Secret Dialing for “Station Speed Dialing” numbers.
Conditions
• When storing a number, press the INTERCOM button at the beginning
and the end of the number to be concealed.
• You can conceal one or more parts of a telephone number.
• The concealed part will be printed out by SMDR.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[990] System Additional Information, Field (26)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – One-Touch Dialing Button
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
One-Touch Dialing
System Speed Dialing
Station Speed Dialing
PT Features,
Secret Dialing
Features
3-103
S
3
Features
Special Features for KX-T7235
The KX-T7235 is provided with a large display that allows the user
to originate calls or to access system facilities with ease. The
display prompts the user with information related to the desired
feature. Examples of this special function are shown below:
Call Log, Outgoing
Extension Dialing
Hotel Application (operator only) (→ See the “HOTEL
APPLICATION.”)
Station Speed Dialing
System Feature Access Menu
System Speed Dialing
Call Log, Outgoing
Description
Provides a display of the last dialed telephone numbers and allows
the user to perform redialing the number by pressing the associated
button.
Conditions
The oldest telephone number will be eliminated when over the limited
numbers are dialed out.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235),
Call Log, Outgoing
Extension Dialing
Description
Provides a display of extension names and numbers. The user can
call an extension by pressing the associated function button.
Conditions
System Programming of extension numbers and names is required.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[003] Extension Number Set
[004] Extension Name Set
[012] ISDN Extension Number Set
3-104
Features
3
S
Features
[013] ISDN Extension Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235),
Extension Dialing
Station Speed Dialing
Description
A list of the names and telephone numbers stored for One-Touch
Dialing is displayed allowing the user to make a one-touch call by
name without having to know the number.
Conditions
• It is necessary to program One-Touch Dialing Numbers and Names
into the 10 function buttons F1 through F10.
• It is programmable to select the first display, number or name.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[990] System Additional Information, Field (19)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Station Speed Dialing Number / Name Assignment (KX-T7235 only)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
One-Touch Dialing
Operation References
—User Manual
Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235),
Station Speed Dialing
System Feature Access Menu
Description
This feature provides a display of the system features available at
any time and allows the user to have access to the desired features.
Conditions
• The features available to access are:
Absent Message Capability
Call Pickup, Group
Call Forwarding (set / cancel)
Do Not Disturb (set / cancel)
Message Waiting
Paging (access / answer)
Paralleled Telephone
Features
3-105
S
3
Features
• In addition to the features above, the operator can have the display of
the following features:
Background Music (BGM) – External
Call Park
Class of Service (primary / secondary)
Night Service
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235),
System Feature Access Menu
System Speed Dialing
Description
A list of the names stored for System Speed Dialing is displayed.
This allows the user to dial by name without having to know the
telephone number. All the user needs to do is pressing the button
associated with the desired name.
Conditions
• The numbers and names for System Speed Dialing must be
programmed.
• If a name is not stored for a number, it is not displayed and cannot be
called with this feature.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
System Speed Dialing
Operation References
—User Manual
Special Display Features (— for KX-T7235),
System Speed Dialing
3-106
Features
3
S
Features
Station Feature Clear
Description
Allows the extension user to cancel the functions set on the user’s
own telephone. The following functions will be cancelled by this
feature:
Absent Message Capability – The message set on the
telephone
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-On)
Background Music that has been turned on
Call Forwarding
Call Log, Incoming – Over-stored mode
Call Pickup Deny
Call Waiting enabled
Calling Line Identification Restriction
Connected Line Identification Restriction
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Executive Busy Override Deny
External Ringer
Log-Out Status
Message Waiting – All the messages that have been left by
other extension users
Paging Deny
Paralleled Telephone enabled
Pickup Dialing
Timed Reminder
Conditions
None
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Station feature clear
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Station Feature Clear
Features
3-107
S
3
Features
Station Hunting
Description
If a called extension is busy, Station Hunting redirects the
incoming call to an idle member of the extension group. Idle
extensions are automatically hunted according to the programmed
type. There are five hunting types available – Circular,
Termination, UCD (Uniform Call Distribution), Voice Mail (VM),
and Automated Attendant (AA).
Circular hunting: The extensions are hunted until an idle
one is found, regardless of jack number.
Termination hunting: The extensions are hunted until
reaching the extension which has the highest jack number in
the group.
UCD: Refer to “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)” in this
section.
AA hunting: All the AA ports are hunted until an idle one is
found to permit AA Service.
VM hunting: All the VM ports are hunted until an idle one
is found to permit VM Service.
One of the hunting types is selected for each extension group.
To leave the hunting group temporarily, use Log-Out function.
To re-join, use Log-In function.
Conditions
• If all the hunted extensions are busy, busy tone is sent to the caller.
• If the called extension has set Do Not Disturb, Call Forwarding, or
Log-Out, Station Hunting skips the extension.
• If UCD is set, the Hunting is performed as a setting of UCD.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type
[602] Extension Group Assignment
Feature References
Operation References
3-108
Features
Section 3, Features,
Log-In / Log-Out
Not applicable.
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
3
S
Features
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Description
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records
detailed call information for outside calls. A printer connected to
the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to print incoming
and outgoing outside calls and charge fee as well as print a hard
copy of the System Programming. To print the record of System
Programming items that have been assigned,use the program [802]
“System Data Printout.” To print the charge fee, use the Station
Programming. To print the call records, use the program [800]
“SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout,” which allows you
to print out the following records:
• Records of all outgoing outside calls or outgoing toll calls.
• Record of incoming outside calls.
An example of printed call records:
Date
24.03.94
24.03.94
24.03.94
24.03.94
24.03.94
24.03.94
24.03.94
24.03.94
•
•
•
(1)
Time
10:03
10:07
10:08
10:08
10:09
10:20
13:01
14:52
•
•
•
(2)
Ext Department Code
201
12345
203
00001
204
10
205
228
2103
201
12345
209
12345
•
•
•
•
•
•
(3)
(4)
CO
Dial Number
01 12345678901234567
20
<INCOMING>
10
<INCOMING>
10
<INCOMING>
14 10222P1-202-346-7890
13
<INCOMING>
02
<Private>
02
<Private>
•
•
•
•
•
•
(5)
(6)
Ring
0’56
0’56
0’04
•
•
•
(7)
Duration
00:05'12
00:00'56
00:00'20
00:10'01
00:09'18
00:21'46
00:10'54
00:03'02
•
•
•
(8)
Charge
00007. 00FR
00000. 00FR
00000. 00FR
00000. 00FR
00011. 28FR
00000. 00FR
00012. 48FR
00017
•
•
•
(9)
Code CD
12345
43121
43212 T
001
F
R
11111
11111
•
•
•
•
•
•
(10) (11)
Example of SMDR printout format:
Explanation
(1) Date : shows the date of the call as Day / Month / Year.
(2) Time : shows the end time of a call as Hour:Minute.
(3) Ext : shows the extension number, floating number, etc.
that engaged in a call.
(4) Department Code : shows the department code appended
to the call.
(5) CO : shows the CO line number used for the call.
(6) Dial Number
Outgoing call: shows the other party’s telephone
number (maximum 22 digits). Valid digits are 0
through 9, , #, P (if PAUSE button is pressed), – (if a
hyphen is entered) or the mark “=” (if a Host PBX
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features
3-109
S
3
Features
access code is entered).
Received call: shows <INCOMING> and if the Caller
ID is available, the calling party’s name or number is
shown.
(7) Ring : shows the ring duration of the incoming call as
Hours / Minutes / Seconds.
(8) Duration : shows the duration of the call as Hours /
Minutes / Seconds.
(9) Charge : shows the amount of charge fee; Unit or Franc.
(10)Code : shows the account code appended to the call.
If the Private Call is made, “11111” is shown as a code.
(11) CD : shows the condition code.
T : Transfer
F : Call Forwarding to CO line
M : Remote Maintenance (MODEM)*
R : Receive an incoming call
A : Answer an incoming call
N : Answer an incoming call
Conditions
• When programmed for outgoing toll calls only, printing occurs only for
calls which start with the numbers stored in any Denied Code Table
from levels 2 to 6.
• This system can store information on up to 100 calls. If more calls are
initiated or received, stored records are deleted starting from the oldest
one.
• This data is not deleted when you reset the system.
• “(8) Charge” is printed out in the format selected in program [117]
“Charge Display Selection.”
• It is programmable to enable or disable the printout of secret dial
numbers.
• If the account code stored in location 01 of the programming table is
dialed, the dialed number is not printed out to SMDR (Private Call).
Refer to the seven and eight lines on an example of printed call records.
• When the paper of the printer runs out or the printer is out-of-service, the
indication “Check Printer” is displayed on the telephone of Operator 1.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.11 Printer Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[000] Date and Time Set
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format
[802] System Data Printout
3-110
Features
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
3
S
Features
[806]–[807] Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2
[990] System Additional Information, Field (26)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Charge Fee Reference
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Charge Fee Reference
Operation References
Not applicable.
Station Programming
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone (PT) user to customize the
extension to their needs. The following are the programming items
available:
For the PT (KX-T7230; KX-T7235; KX-T7250)
Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
Flexible Button Assignment
Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
Handset / Headset Selection
Intercom Alerting Assignment
Key Click Tone On / Off Assignment
Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming / Outgoing
Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons
Station Programming Data Default Set
For display PT (KX-T7230; KX-T7235) only,
Charge Fee Reference
Self-Extension Number Confirmation
For large display PT (KX-T7235) only,
Station Speed Dialing Number / Name Assignment
For Operator extension PT only,
Remote Station Lock Control
For Operator 1 extension PT only,
Call Log Lock Control, Incoming
Detailed information and programming instructions are described
in the User Manual, Station Programming.
Conditions
During Station Programming, the PT is considered to be in busy status.
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual
Operator Service Features...............................................User Manual
Remote Station Lock Control
Call Log Lock Control, Incoming
Features
3-111
S
3
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Features
Station Programming Data Default Set
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to return all the following
items programmed on the telephone to default setting.
Programming Items
Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment
Full One-Touch Dialing Assignment
Handset / Headset Selection
Intercom Alerting Assignment
Key Click Tone Assignment
Preferred Line Assignment – Incoming
Preferred Line Assignment – Outgoing
Default
Tone 1
On
Handset
Tone Call
On
Ringing Line
Intercom Line
Station Programming is used to set or cancel these items at
individual telephones.
Conditions
None
Programming References
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Station Programming Data Default Set
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Station Programming
Operation References
Not applicable.
Station Speed Dialing
Description
Allows an extension user to store frequently dialed numbers in
order to place a call with abbreviated dialing. It is performed by
dialing the feature number and a speed dial number from 0 through
9. Up to 10 numbers can be stored for each telephone.
Conditions
• Station Speed Dialing can be followed by manual dialing to supplement
the dialed digits.
3-112
Features
3
S
Features
• You may make a call with One-Touch Dialing button, instead of Station
Speed Dialing.
• The single line telephone (SLT) may be replaced to a proprietary
telephone (PT) temporarily to store one-touch dialing into memory.
The Function Buttons F1 through F10 are corresponded to speed dial
numbers as follows:
F1 — 0
F6 — 5
F2 — 1
F7 — 6
F3 — 2
F8 — 7
F4 — 3
F9 — 8
F5 — 4
F10 — 9
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Station speed dialing, Station speed dialing
programming
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
One-Touch Dialing
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Station Speed Dialing
System Connection*
Description
System Connection allows two main units, KX-TD1232 to work
together as one system. This expands the capacity of the system,
number of extensions, CO lines and so on. Two connected systems
are called the master and the slave systems.
A maximum capacity of the system is as follows:
Item
Maximum Quantity Maximum Quantity
(Single System)
(System Connection)
ISDN S0 Line
12
24
Extension Jack
32
64
DSS Console
8
16
Doorphone
1
2
Door Opener
2
4
External Pager
2
4
External Relay
1
2
External Ringer
1
2
External Sensor
1
2
Music Source
2
4
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features
3-113
S
3
Conditions
Features
• The following resources can be used by either system:
(a) External pagers
(b) Music sources used for Music on Hold
(c) Music sources used for Background Music (BGM)
(d) Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR); EIA (RS-232C)
ports
(e) Call Parking areas
• System Inter Connection Card (KX-TD192), optional expansion cards
to connect both systems, must be installed for this feature.
• Once this feature is employed, the data adjustment in both systems are
performed at the programmed time (default is 1:00) every day. The
time can be changed by programming.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.4.8 System Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[115] Adjust Time
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
System Data Default Set
Description
This system permits re-initialization of system-programmed data.
If all the programmed data is cleared, the system will restart with
the default setting.
Conditions
The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 5.2,
Default Values.
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
Section 2, Installation,
2.8 System Data Clear
3-114
Features
3
S
Features
System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer
Description
This system can be programmed and administered using a personal
computer. EIA / Remote Programming & Diagnosis floppy is
required to perform this feature. There are two programming
methods:
On-Site Programming
By connecting a personal computer (PC) to your system, system
programming and maintenance* can be performed locally. There
are two ways available to perform the above:
(Method 1.) Using the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port
Connect the PC to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port provided.
The main unit has a Serial Interface (RS-232C) port which can be
used for either system administration or SMDR.
* (Method 2.) Using a modem
Install the optional Remote Card. Connect the PC to an extension
jack. Assign the floating number of the modem in System
Programming. Dial this number from the PC.
* Remote Programming
You can perform system programming and maintenance from a
remote site using a PC. Install the Remote Card and assign the
floating number of the modem in System Programming.
Starting system administration from a remote location can be done
in the following ways.
• Call an extension (probably the Operator) from a remote
location and request a transfer to the modem.
• Assign the modem as the destination of the DIL 1:1
feature.
Conditions
• A proprietary telephone can be used to perform System Programming.
• Only one access is allowed to System Programming at any one time.
• To access system administration, a valid password must be entered.
The password is factory-programmed and can be changed.
• System administration can be performed on-line except for the
procedures of diagnosis.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.4.7 Remote Card Installation*
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[107] System Password
[813] Floating Number Assignment
[814] Modem Standard
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Features
3-115
S
3
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Features
System Programming with Proprietary Telephone
Description
This system can be programmed with a personal computer or a
proprietary telephone (PT).
Proprietary telephones available for System Programming are:
KX-T7235; and KX-T7230 (Display Proprietary Telephones).
Two extensions are allowed to perform System Programming. The
extensions available are:
(1) An extension that is connected to jack 01.
(2) An extension that is assigned as a manager.
For more information and programming instructions, refer to
Section 4, “System Programming.”
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
During System Programming the system operates normally.
During System Programming the extension is considered to be busy.
The display on the PT permits interactive programming.
Only one access is allowed to System Programming at any one time.
To access system administration, a valid password must be entered.
The password is factory-programmed and can be changed.
• A personal computer can be used to perform System Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[006] Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
[107] System Password
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
System Speed Dialing
Description
3-116
Features
This feature supports 500 abbreviated dial numbers available to all
users. A system speed dial number is dialed out by pressing the
AUTO button and a 3-digit code (000 through 499). It is possible
to store two hundred 24-digit telephone numbers per system
(maximum).
3
S
Features
Conditions
[For proprietary telephone users only]
• Speed Dialing, One-Touch Dialing, manual dialing, Last Number
Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used in combination.
[For single line telephone users only]
• If a stored feature number includes “ ” or “#,” a rotary or pulse single
line telephones cannot use it.
Programming References
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[002] System Speed Dialing Name Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, System speed dialing
[509]-[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialing
– Day / Night
Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing
PT Features, SLT Features;
System Speed Dialing
System Working Report
Description
The Digital Super Hybrid System automatically records the
system's working state. A printer connected to the EIA (RS-232C)
port can be used to print the recorded data.
Recorded contents are as follows:
1. Date of record
• The date and time when cleared.
• The date and time when printed out.
2. Incoming calls
• The number of incoming calls
• The number of answered incoming calls
• The ratio of the answered calls to the incoming calls
Number of answered calls × 100 (%)
Number of incoming calls
• The average time from receipt of call to answer of the
incoming and answered calls.
• The average duration time of talk of the answered calls.
3. Outgoing calls
• The number of access requested
• The number of access succeeded
Features
3-117
T
3
Features
• The ratio of access succeeded
Number of access succeeded × 100 (%)
Number of access requested
• The average duration of the dialed calls
These records can be deleted by the manager and the operator, and
new data will be recorded thereafter:
Conditions
Connect a printer provided with and EIA (RS-232C) connector located on
the main unit. After connecting a printer, do not press the RETURN key,
if provided on the printer, in 10 seconds.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation
2.3.10 Printer Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, System Working Report
[806]-[807] EIA (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1/ Port 2
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
System Working Report
Terminate
Description
The Terminate button is used to allow the proprietary telephone
user to disconnect the current call and originate another call without
hanging up first.
Conditions
• Pressing the Terminate button disconnects the conversation, outputs an
SMDR record, and get an internal dial tone.
• The proprietary telephone is provided with no Terminate button
originally. However a flexible CO button can be assigned as the
Terminate button either by System or Station Programming.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
3-118
Features
3
T
Features
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – Terminate Button
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features,
Terminate
Time-Out, Variable
Description
Provides timers to control various features or functions.
The following timers are programmable:
System Timer Items
Automatic Redial Interval Time
Automatic Redial Repeated Times
Call Forwarding – No Answer Time-Out
External Relay Time
Hold Recall Time
Intercept Routing Time-Out
Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
Pickup Dialing Waiting Time
SMDR Duration Count Starting Time
Toll Restriction First Digit Time-Out
Toll Restriction Inter-digit Time-Out
Transfer Recall Time
Extension Timer Items
Delayed Ringing Count
Voice Mail Integration Timer Items
DTMF Signal Duration
DTMF Signal Waiting Time
after VPS Answer
DTMF Signal Waiting Time
after VPS calls Extension
Range
60 – 1200s
1 – 12 times
1 – 12 rings
0 – 99 s
0 – 240 s
3 – 48 rings
0 – 64 min
1–8s
0 – 60 s
5 – 120 s
5 – 30 s
3 – 48 rings
Disable / Immediate /
1 / 3 / 6 rings / No ring
80 / 160 ms
0.5 / 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 s
0.5 / 1.0 / 1.5 / 2.0 s
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[200] Hold Recall Time
Features
3-119
T
3
Features
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
[203] Intercept Time
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time
[213] External Relay Connecting Time
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (6) through (8)
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable.
Timed Reminder
Description
Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm ringing at a preset
time as a wake up or reminder. This feature can be programmed to
be active only once or everyday. When the user goes off-hook during
the alarm tone, Time Announce or the dial tone 3 is sent. When setting,
the set time can be heard by Time Stamp function.
Conditions
• Be sure that the system clock works.
• Setting a new time clears the preset time when either the operator or the
extension set the time.
• The alarm ringing continues for 30 seconds. To stop it, lift the handset
or, with a proprietary telephone, press any button.
• If the displayed language is assigned to German in the [101] Language
Assignment program, Time Announce is sent when the user goes offhook or sets the time, but if another language is assigned, the dial tone 3
or a confirmation tone is sent.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Timed reminder
[101] Language Assignment
Feature References
Section 4, Features,
HOTEL APPLICATION – Timed Reminder, Remote (Wake-Up Call)
Operation References
—User Manual
PT Features, SLT Features;
Timed Reminder
3-120
Features
3
T
Features
Toll Restriction
Description
Toll Restriction is in conjunction with the assigned Class of
Service, can prohibit certain extension users from placing
unauthorized toll calls.
Every extension is programmed to belong to one of eight Classes of
Service. Each Class of Service is programmed to have a toll
restriction level for day mode and night mode.
There are eight toll restriction levels available. Toll restriction level
1 is the highest level and the level 8 is the lowest. That is, level 1
allows all toll calls and levels 7 and 8 disallows all toll calls.
Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed deny and excepted code tables.
The pre-assigned emergency numbers such as “110” and “112” are
allowed to call in a any levels.
Denied Code Tables
An outgoing outside call made by an extension with a toll
restriction level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the
selected Denied Code Tables. If the leading seven digits of the
dialed number (not including the line access code) are not found in
the table, the call is made. There are five system programs for
Denied Code Tables:[301]-[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for
Levels 2 through 6: each program is used to make up a Denied
Code Table for Levels 2 through 6 respectively.
Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited.
These numbers are defined as denied codes. Each table can store
up to 20 denied codes, each of which consisting of seven digits.
Excepted Code Tables
These tables are used to override a programmed denied code. A
call denied by the selected Denied Code Tables is checked against
the selected Excepted Code Tables, and if a match is found, the call
is made.
There are five system programs for these tables:
[306]-[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6:
each programming is used to make up an Excepted Code Table for
Levels 2 through 6.
Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the
denied codes. These numbers are defined as excepted codes. Each
table can store up to 20 excepted codes, each of which consisting of
seven digits.
Features
3-121
T
3
Features
Applicable Denied and Excepted Code Tables depend on the
assigned toll restriction level of an extension as follows:
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
Level 6
Level 7
Level 8
Denied Code Tables
None
Table for Level 2
Tables for Levels 2 and 3
Tables for Levels 2 to 4
Tables for Levels 2 to 5
Tables for Levels 2 to 6
None
None
Excepted Code Tables
None
Tables for Levels 2 through 6
Tables for Levels 3 through 6
Tables for Levels 4 through 6
Tables for Levels 5 through 6
Tables for Level 6
None
None
[Explanation]
Level 1: allows all calls.
Level 2: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Table
for Level 2 except the codes stored in Excepted
Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6.
Level 3: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables
for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6.
Level 4: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables
for Levels 2 through 4 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 4 through 6.
Level 5: denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables
for Levels 2 through 5 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Tables for Levels 5 and 6.
Level 6: • denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables
for Levels 2 through 6 except the codes stored in
Excepted Code Table for Level 6.
• denied intercom calls except operator calls.
Level 7: Allows intercom calls only.
Level 8: Allows operator calls only.
Example of Toll Restriction programming
Here is an example to explain the procedures for Toll Restriction
programming.
1. Determining the application
Determine the dialing numbers that should be denied for levels 2
through 6. (Levels 1, 7 and 8 are fixed and do not require
programming.)
3-122
Features
3
T
Features
[ Entry Example]
Level
2
3
4
5
6
Denied Code
011
011
976
1xxx976
011
976
1xxx976
0
011
976
1xxx976
0
411
1xxx555
011
976
1xxx976
0
411
1xxx555
1
x0
x1
Excepted Code
None
None
None
None
911
1911
130
Note: “x” substitutes a digit.
2. Programming
(1) [500]-[501] Toll Restriction Assignment
Assign a toll restriction level to each Class of Service (COS).
[Example]
COS
1
2
:
8
Level (Day)
1
2
:
8
Level (Night)
6
6
:
8
Features
3-123
T
3
Features
(2) [301]-[305] Denied Code Table Entry
Depending on the application, enter the denied codes in the
associated tables. You can use numeric characters and the wild
card character “ .”
Level-2 Denied Code Table
Code
Location
001
01
:
:
20
Level-3 Denied Code Table
Code
Location
976
01
02
1
976
:
20
Level-5 Denied Code Table
Code
Location
411
01
02
1
555
:
20
Level-6 Denied Code Table
Code
Location
1
01
0
02
1
03
:
20
Level-4 Denied Code Table
Code
Location
0
01
:
:
20
(3) [306]-[310] Excepted Code Table Entry
Depending on the application, enter the excepted codes in the
associated tables. You can use numeric characters and the wild
card character “ .”
Level-6 Excepted Code Table
Location
Code
1
911
2
1911
3
130
••
•
20
[Explanation]
If your Toll Restriction Level is 6;
a) You cannot make a call whose toll call number is “201,” because
the number whose second digit “0” is one of the Denied Codes for
Level 6.
b) You can make a call whose toll call number is “130.” Though
the number whose first digit “1” is one of the Denied Codes for
Level 6, the number “130” is one of the Excepted Codes for Level
6. The Excepted Codes override the Denied Codes.
3-124
Features
3
T
Features
Flow Chart of
Toll Restriction
The user makes a toll call.
Is the call made by System Speed
Dialing ?
Yes
No
Levels 7, 8
What is the extension – toll
restriction level?
Check the level for System
Speed Dialing.
Level 1
Levels 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Is the dialed number found in
applicable Denied Code Tables?
No
Yes
Is the dialed number found in
applicable Excepted Code Tables?
Yes
No
The call is denied. Reorder
Tone is returned to the user.
The call is allowed.
Features
3-125
T
3
Conditions
Features
• Toll restriction checks are applied to the following:
(1) Account Code Entry
(2) Dial Access, Automatic
(3) Line Access, CO Line Group
(4) Line Access, Individual
• If a stored Host PBX access code is found in the dialed number, a toll
restriction check starts for succeeding telephone number.
• Toll restriction for System Speed Dialing can be assigned in the Class
of Service setting.
• It is programmable whether the “ ” or “#” the user dials is to be
checked or not on the Toll Restriction code. This is useful to prevent
unauthorized calls which could be possible through certain Central
Offices’ exchange system.
• It is programmable to admit the press of the FLASH button, during an
outside call on the extensions in Levels 7 and 8.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[009] Emergency Dial Number Set
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
[301]–[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
[306]–[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
[509]-[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialing
– Day / Night
[990] System Additional Information, Field (14)
Feature References
Operation References
Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction Override by
Account Code Entry
Toll Restriction Override for
System Speed Dialing
Not applicable.
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
Description
Allows the extension user to override toll restriction temporarily to
make a toll call from a toll-restricted telephone. The user can carry
out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before
dialing the telephone number.
Conditions
• The toll restriction level of the user is changed to level 2 by this feature.
Thus this can be used by extension users assigned a toll restriction level
from 3 through 6. The levels 1 and 2 are not changed.
3-126
Features
3
T
Features
• A Class of Service which is assigned Account Code Entry – Verified
Toll Restriction Override permits the class members to override their
toll restrictions.
• Up to 40 account codes can be programmed for Verified Account code
operation. These are used for Toll Restriction Override.
• If the user does not enter any account code or enters an invalid account
code, an ordinary toll restriction check is done.
Flow Chart of TRS Override by Account Code Entry
TRS Override by Account Code Entry is attempted.
Verified - All Calls
Option
What is the account code mode?
Verified - Toll Restriction Override
No
Is the entered code identified with the stored codes?
Yes
Yes
Is the TRS level Level 1?
No
Is the entered code identified
with the stored code?
Yes
No
TRS level changes to Level 2.
Toll Restriction check starts.
The call is not allowed.
Reorder tone is returned
to the user.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Account code entry
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Account Code Entry
Toll Restriction
PT Features, SLT Features;
Toll Restriction Override — Toll Restriction Override by Account Code
Entry
Features
3-127
T
3
Features
Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing
Description
Calls originated by System Speed Dialing are restricted depending
on the extension’s toll restriction level for System Speed Dialing.
Conditions
Same as the conditions of Toll Restriction feature except that the data for
System Speed Dialing are used as the toll restriction levels.
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[001] System Speed Dialing Number Set
[100] Flexible Numbering, System Speed Dialing
[509]-[510] Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialing – Day /
Night
Feature References
Operation References
Section 3, Features,
System Speed Dialing
Toll Restriction
Not applicable.
Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Description
A tone signal is sent from the external pager or the external ringer
when an incoming outside call is received. Any extension user can
answer the call.
Conditions
• Connect a user-supplied external device (pager or ringer).
• Two external pagers can be installed per system. One external ringer
can be installed per system.
• Floating numbers of devices are programmable.
• TAFAS can be used in the following cases:
a) The floating number of an external device is assigned as the
DIL 1:1 destination. In this case all the incoming calls on the
specified line will be signaled.
b) The floating number of an external device is assigned as the
Intercept Routing destination. In this case incoming calls
redirected to the destination will be signaled.
c) The floating number of an external device is assigned as the
Direct Dialing In destination.
• Confirmation tone is sent to the user before being connected to the
caller. Eliminating the tone is programmable.
3-128
Features
3
T
Features
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.8 External Relay, External Ringer and External Sensor Connection
2.3.9 External Pager (Paging Equipment) Connection
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[100] Flexible Numbering, Paging – external answer / TAFAS answer,
External ringer, External ringer answer
[418] External Ringer Assignment
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[813] Floating Number Assignment
[990] System Additional Information, Field (16)
Feature References
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
External Ringer
Paging – External
PT Features, SLT Features;
Trunk (CO Line) Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Two-Way Recording into Voice Mailbox†
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to record the conversation
into one's mailbox or another mailbox, while talking on the phone.
Note:
When you record Two-Way telephone conversations, you should
inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded.
Conditions
• A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Two-Way Record
button or a Two-Way Transfer button.
• When all the voice mail ports are busy, pressing the Two-Way Record
button sends an alarm tone.
• When all the voice mail ports are busy, pressing the Two-Way Transfer
button followed by an extension number sends an alarm tone.
Programming References
System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
Station Programming,
Flexible Button Assignment — Two-Way Record Button, Two-Way
Transfer Button
Feature References
None
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
Features
3-129
T
3
Operation References
Features
PT Features,
Two-Way Recording into Voice Mailbox
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Description
Allows an incoming calls (CO line, extension) to be distributed
uniformly to a specific group of extensions called UCD group.
Calls to a UCD group hunt for an idle station in circular way,
starting at the extension following the last one called. This UCD
feature is particularly helpful when certain extension receives a
high volume of calls compared with other extensions.
Log-In / Log-Out feature is available for UCD.
Conditions
• UCD can be used in the following cases:
a) The floating number of UCD is assigned as the DIL 1:1 destination.
3-130
Features
3
U
Features
An outline sketch of UCD is shown below.
(1) When a number of calls have been
arrived at a UCD group, the 1st call
arrives at extension A first.
(2) When the 1st call arrives at extension A,
the 2nd call arrives at extension B.
3rd call is in
the queue
Calls have arrived at a UCD group
3rd call
is in the queue
2nd call
is in the queue
1st call
is in the queue
2nd call is in
the queue
UCD group
Extension B
(When extension B is
busy or UCD log out
has been set to
extension B, the call
arrives at extension C.)
UCD group
Extension A
(When extension A is
busy or UCD log out
has been set in
extension A, the call
arrives at extension B.)
Extension C
Extension A
Extension B
(When extension B is
busy or UCD log out
has been set in
extension B, the call
arrives at extension C.)
(3) When the 2nd call arrives at extension C,
the 3rd call will arrive at extension A.
Extension C
(When extension C is
busy or UCD log out
has been set in
extension C, the call
arrives at extension A.)
Features
3-131
U
3
•
•
•
•
•
Features
b) The floating number of UCD is assigned as the Intercept Routing
destination.
c) The floating number of UCD is dialed from the extension.
d) The floating number of UCD is assigned as the Direct Dialing In
destination.
This feature requires assignment of UCD group in the System
Programming. An extension cannot belong to two or more UCD
groups.
The floating number can be assigned on UCD group basis. The UCD
group is based on Extension group.
It is possible to set the log-in or log-out status on extension basis. UCD
call can arrive at the extension in log-in status within the UCD group,
and cannot arrive at the extensions in log-out status. If the extension
would like to leave the group temporarily, the extension will set in logout status by the feature number to prevent UCD calls being sent to
their extensions. When the extension re-joins the group, the extension
will set in log-in status.
There should be at least one extension that is in log-in status.
The following extension should not belong to the extension group
which is assigned as a UCD group;
a) The extension is assigned as an XDP-enable extension in program
[600].
b) The extension is assigned as a disconnect extension in program
[611].
Programming References
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type
[813] Floating Number Assignment
Feature Reference
Operation References
—User Manual
Section 3, Features,
Extension Group
Log-In / Log-Out
Station Hunting
PT Features, SLT Features;
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
User Programming (Manager Programming)
Description
User Programming (Manager Programming) can be programmed
by the end user. Programs [000] through [014] can be changed by
the user.
Conditions
None
3-132
Features
3
V
Features
Programming References
User Programming ...........................................................User Manual,
Feature References
None
Operation References
Not applicable
Voice Mail Integration
Description
This system can accommodate Voice Processing System (VPS)
equipment, which offers the user a Voice Mail and an Automated
Attendant Services. If an extension user has set Call Forwarding
destination to the VPS, a calling party will be forwarded to the VPS
and can leave a voice message in the mailbox of the extension.
When a call is transferred to the VPS by the Call Forwarding or
Intercept Routing – No Answer features, the mailbox number is
sent to the VPS automatically with DTMF signaling (Follow On
ID). Up to eight extension jacks can be connected to VPS as
extensions in the system.
System Explanation
1. Voice Mail Service
1.1 Call Forwarding to VM
If an extension user sets Call Forwarding (C. FWD) whose
destination is the VPS, an incoming call is forwarded to the
VPS under the proper conditions. The system sends to the
VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at that
time. Therefore the calling party can leave his / her message
in the mailbox of the desired extension without knowing the
mailbox number.
Features
3-133
V
3
Features
Outside Call
DIL 1:1
System
Intercom
Call
VPS
C. FWD
Extension
VM 1
VM 2
VM Hunting
Chain
VM X
VM 3
Outside Call
DIL 1:1
System
VPS
C. FWD
Operator
Extension
VM 1
VM 2
Transfer
VM Hunting
Chain
VM X
VM 3
1.2 Intercept Routing to VM
If a CO line is set as Intercept Routing – No Answer (IRNA)
whose destination is the VPS, an outside call is forwarded to
the VPS under the proper conditions. The system sends to
the VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at
that time. Therefore the calling party can leave his / her
message in the mailbox of the desired extension without
knowing the mailbox number.
3-134
Features
3
V
Features
Outside Call
DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N
System
VPS
IRNA
Extension
VM 1
VM 2
VM Hunting
Chain
VM X
VM 3
1.3 Transferring to VM
The extension user can transfer an outside call to the VPS so
that calling party can leave his / her message in the mailbox
of the desired extension. The extension user should use the
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to
the VPS. Pressing this button and entering the extension
number allows the extension user to transfer the call to the
mailbox of the corresponding extension.
Outside Call
System
(1) Transfer
Extension
busy/no answer
VPS
(2) Transfer
Extension
(Operator) by VM Transfer
VM 1
VM 2
VM Hunting
Chain
Button
VM X
VM 3
Features
3-135
V
3
Features
1.4 Changing from VM to Automated Attendant (AA)
The Automated Attendant Service is automatically activated
in the following cases:
1) The incoming call is not answered by the operator and
IRNA is activated.
2) The operator is assigned as a destination of DIL 1:1 and
the operator sets the Call Forwarding to VPS.
Outside Call
DIL 1:1, DIL 1:N
System
VPS
C.FWD, IRNA
Operator
VM→AA 1
VM→AA 2
VM→AA X
VM→AA 3
1.5 Listening to a Recorded Message
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS can turn on the
MESSAGE button indicator of the corresponding telephone
as a notification to the user of the telephone. (Panasonic KXTVP series can do this.) The VPS notifies the extension user
that there is a message waiting in his / her mailbox. When
the MESSAGE button indicator is lit, pressing the button
allows the extension user to play back the stored message.
2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service
2.1 AA to Extension
AA receives and answers an outside call and offers services
such as transferring to a specified extension or the
corresponding mailbox by the DTMF signaling which is sent
from the calling party.
3-136
Features
3
V
Features
Outside Call
DIL 1:1
System
VPS
Transfer
Extension
AA 1
AA 2
AA Hunting
Chain
AA X
Conditions
AA 3
• A VPS can be assigned as the destination of the following features:
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Call Forwarding – Busy
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Call Forwarding – No Answer
Intercept Routing – No Answer
In these functions, the caller to the extension need not know the
mailbox number of the called extension because the code is
automatically transmitted to the VPS (Follow On ID function). If a DIL
1:N call is transferred to the VPS by IRNA, your system transmits the
mailbox number of the lowest jack number of the receiving extensions.
• A mailbox number is a respective extension number by default. The
mailbox number can be changed, only if program [990] “System
Additional Information, Field (18)” is set to “free.”
• Pressing the Voice Mail Transfer button and dialing the extension
number allows the extension user to transfer to the corresponding
mailbox. In this case, Follow On ID function is available.
• The Voice Mail extension should be set to Data Line Security to
achieve proper recording.
• It is recommended that you do not connect more than VM ports to each
card or unit.
Connection References
Section 2, Installation,
2.3.2 Extension Connection
2.4.5 Extension Connection
Features
3-137
V
3
Features
Programming References
Common
Section 4, System Programming,
[005] Flexible CO Button Assignment
[100] Flexible Numbering, Call forwarding / do not disturb,
Message waiting
[113] VM Status DTMF Set
[114] VM Command DTMF Set
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension — Day / Night
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension — Day / Night
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (6) through (9), (18)
Station Programming.......................................................User Manual,
Flexible Button Assignment – MESSAGE Button Voice Mail (VM)
Transfer Button
For VM Service
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type (Select Voice Mail Hunting.)
[990] System Additional Information, Fields (10), (36), (37)
For AA Service
Section 4, System Programming,
[106] Station Hunting Type (Select Automated Attendant Hunting.)
[990] System Additional Information, Field (24)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – All Calls
Call Forwarding – Busy
Call Forwarding – Busy / No
Answer
Call Forwarding – No Answer
Intercept Routing
Station Hunting
Operation References PT Features, SLT Features;
—User Manual
Voice Mail Integration
Operator Service Features,
Voice Mail Transfer
Voice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones†
Description
The Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing
System Can be connected to the Digital Super Hybrid System
(DSHS) in a tightly integrated fashion.
The system sends the VPS data which contains the extension
number configuration information and the VPS automatically
creates mailboxes with this data (Automatically Configuration —
Quick Setup).
3-138
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Features
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
3
V
Features
Conditions
• A maximum of one VPS can be connected to each DSHS cabinet.
• A maximum of 3 DSHS jacks can be connected to a proprietary
telephone capable VPS. Because a proprietary telephone connection
supports up to two simultaneous voice calls, only one DSHS jack needs
to be connected for each 2 VPS ports.
• Connect the jacks and ports in ascending order. In other words, the
lowest number DSHS jack used for VPS connection must be connected
to the lowest number VPS port.
• The VPS data is transmitted to the VPS on the lowest jacks port.
Programming References
[126]
[127]
[128]
[617]
Voice Mail Number Assignment
Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment
Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment
Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration
Operation References
Not applicable
Volume Control – Speaker / Ringer
Description
Allows the proprietary telephone user to turn up or down the
following volumes as desired:
Ringer volume
Speaker volume
Conditions
The control method depends on the telephone type:
• With a proprietary telephone, press the volume control button
(VOLUME ∧ / ∨ UP / DOWN) to select a desired volume level.
However the ringer volume of KX-T7250 is selected with Ringer
Volume Selector (OFF/LOW/HIGH).
Programming References
No programming required.
Feature References
None
Operation References
—User Manual
Configuration,
Volume Control – Ringer / Speaker
Features
3-139
Section 4
System Programming
This section provides step-by-step programming instructions
for a proprietary telephone.
4.1
General Programming Instructions
Default Setting
This system has a default factory setting. If any of the
programming needs to be changed, you will find the necessary
information in Section 3, “Features.” This makes the system very
simple to install and customize as required by the customer. Any
required changes can be written on “Programming Tables.”
Required Telephone Set
One of the following telephone sets is required for System
Programming:
• Proprietary Telephone (PT): KX-T7235, KX-T7230
Extensions Used for Programming
Connect one of the above-mentioned telephone sets to either of the
following:
• Jack number 1
• Jack programmed as a manager extension
To assign the manager extension, see Section 4.2 [006]
“Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day/Night.”
• All jacks for Manager Programming [000] through [014]
4-2
System Programming
4.1.1 Using the Proprietary Telephone
Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display PT
Three soft buttons are provided just below the display on the
display Proprietary Telephones (PT). The functions of these soft
buttons vary as the programming procedures advance from step to
step. Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are
shown on the lower line of the display. (See “Viewing the Display”
on page 4-6 for more information on the display lines.)
If the SHIFT button indicator is on, two functions are available
with each soft button. To alternate between the two functions,
press the SHIFT button on the right side of the display.
Soft button variations
Type 1
Example:
KX-T7230 Display
CLR NEXT
Buttons
Soft 1
Soft 2
Soft 3
SHIFT
Type 2
Press SHIFT
to alternate
SKP+ CLR NEXT
Soft 1
Soft 2
Soft 3
SKPSoft 1
SHIFT
PREV
Soft 2
Soft 3
SHIFT
Type 3
—>
Soft 1
Press SHIFT
to alternate
SEL+ NEXT
Soft 2
Soft 3
SHIFT
<—
Soft 1
SEL- PREV
Soft 2
System Programming
Soft 3
SHIFT
4-3
4.1.1 Using the Proprietary Telephone
Type 4
A
B
C
Soft 1
Soft 2
Soft 3
Press SHIFT
to alternate
SHIFT
a
b
c
Soft 1
Soft 2
Soft 3
SHIFT
Type 5
Press SHIFT
to alternate
SKP+ SEL NEXT
Soft 1
Soft 2
Soft 3
SHIFT
SKP- CLR PREV
Soft 1
Soft 2
Soft 3
SHIFT
You can use either the soft buttons or the overlay buttons. (For
overlay buttons, refer to “Using the Overlay” below.)
Throughout the programming you will see instructions such as
“Press PREV.” If you use the soft buttons, this means press
SHIFT, release SHIFT and then press Soft 3. The (PREV)
function is performed.
Note
If you use the soft buttons and if programming instructions tell you to
press the following buttons, you may press soft buttons shown below.
Instructions
SELECT
CLEAR
Soft button
SEL+,SEL-,or SEL
CLR
Using the Overlay
A programming overlay is packed with the main unit at the factory.
This overlay should be used at all times while in programming
mode since the functions of the telephone keys change while in
programming mode as follows: (The original names are in
parentheses.)
4-4
System Programming
4.1.1 Using the Proprietary Telephone
During Operation
During Programming
(PAUSE)
(SP-PHONE)
(REDIAL)
(AUTO ANSWER / MUTE)
(FLASH)
(TRANSFER)
(FWD/DND)
(CONF)
(INTERCOM )
(AUTO DIAL / STORE)
(HOLD)
PAUSE / PROGRAM
NEXT
PREV (PREVIOUS)
SELECT
FLASH
CLEAR
→
–←
SECRET
STORE
END
Location of Controls with the Overlay
The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the KXT7235 and KX-T7230 while in programming mode.
SECRET
PAUSE CLEAR
UP
SECRET
PAUSE CLEAR
UP
1QZ!?
2ABC
3DEF
1QZ!?
2ABC
3DEF
1
2
3
1
2
3
4GHI
5JKL
6MNO
4GHI
5JKL
6MNO
4
5
6
4
5
6
7PRS
8TUV
9WXY
7PRS
8TUV
9WXY
7
8
9
7
8
9
ä/ö+ü–
0.,’:;
#$%&=( )
ä/ö+ü–
0.,’:;
#$%&=( )
SELECT
CLEAR
NEXT
DOWN
STORE
SELECT
0
PREV
FLASH
KX-T7230
DOWN
STORE
0
CLEAR
NEXT
PREV
FLASH
KX-T7235
Viewing the Display
The display gives you helpful information, such as what you should
do now, what you have done, etc..
The KX-T7230 and the KX-T7235 both utilize two information
lines for programming. The upper line is called the Message Line
and the lower one is called the Function Line.
System Programming
4-5
4.1.1 Using the Proprietary Telephone
The Message Line (upper) shows you what you should do or what
you should select. It also allows you to confirm what you have just
entered. The display capacity is 16 digits. If your entry exceeds
the capacity, you can shift the display by pressing→ or ← button.
The Function Line (lower) shows the current function of the soft
buttons. These functions change with the programming
procedures.
SYS-PGM NO? ->
NEXT
← Message Line →
← Function Line →
KX-T7230 Display
SYS-PGM NO? ->
NEXT
← Message Line
← Function Line
KX-T7235 Display
Before entering the programming mode
Before entering programming mode, confirm that:
• Your telephone is on-hook.
• No calls are on hold at your telephone.
Entering the programming mode
To program any programming mode:
Press PROGRAM +
(default=1234).
+ # and enter your System Password
• The display shows the Initial Message: SYS-PGM NO? ->
To enter the only Manager Programming mode, the system
password is not necessary as follows:
Press PROGRAM + 0 + 0 .
• The display shows the Initial Message: MNG-PGM NO? ->
Notes
4-6
• If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM button is
pressed, it is cancelled.
• The System Password entered is not shown on the display. The System
Password can be changed by System Programming. Refer to Section
4.3 [107] “System Password.”
• During the programming mode, your extension is treated as a busy
extension.
• Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any
one time.
System Programming
4.1.2 Programming Ways
Advancing to the next stage
When “SYS-PGM NO? ->” is displayed, you can select one of
the following:
• To go to program [000], press the NEXT button.
• To go to another program, enter the 3-digit program address.
Rotation of jack number
Each jack of our Digital Super Hybrid System supports the
connection of a proprietary telephone and an analog device with
different extension numbers (eXtra Device Port: XDP function).
To program this function it is necessary to assign two parts for each
jack. The first part of jack one is 01-1. The second part of jack one
is 01-2. The first part of jack two is 02-1 and so on. The NEXT
and PREV buttons can be used to move from jack to jack as
required.
Example;
NEXT
#01-1
#01-2
PREV
Note
NEXT
NEXT
#02-1
PREV
#02-2 ......
PREV
The first part of a jack is for a PT of a XDP-assigned jack. The second
part is for a single line device. Program [600] “EXtra Device Port”
assigns which jacks are XDP.
Storing your data
Press STORE to store your data.
• The STORE indicator lights red and confirmation tone
sounds.
* Confirmation tone (one beep)
After pressing STORE, you will hear a beep. This informs you
that your storage is completed.
* Alarm tone (three beeps)
If you hear the alarm, check that your entry is valid.
Making another selection within the same program address
• To make the next higher selection, press NEXT
• To make the previous selection, press PREV
• To make a specific selection, press SELECT and then enter the
number.
System Programming
4-7
4.1.2 Programming Ways
Going to another program address
After pressing STORE, you can go to another program with either
of the following two methods:
(1) • To go to the next larger program address:
Press Soft 1 (SKP+) or VOLUME (DOWN).
• To go to the next smaller program address:
Press SHIFT + Soft 1 (SKP–) or VOLUME
(UP).
(2) To go to a specific program address:
Press ENDE, then enter the program address.
Method (1) is useful when you want to perform a series of
programs consecutively. For example, to change the programming
in addresses [000] to [011], use this method. You can move from
[000] to [001], from [001] to [002], and so on by pressing the
SKP+ or VOLUME . You can move in reverse order from
[008] to [007], etc. by pressing the SKP– or VOLUME .
This method can also be used to move between neighboring
program groups: For example, you can move between the program
addresses [011] and [100], [123] and [200], and so on. Also, you
can move between the smallest program address [000] and the
largest one [992].
Method (2) is useful when you wish to jump to another program
address. For example, you have just finished with program [006]
and now you want to go to program [301]. Neither SKP+/
VOLUME nor SKP– or VOLUME is convenient in this
case. So you should press END and enter 301.
Note
The following programming instructions suppose that you have already
entered programming mode and that you will use Method (2).
Confirming the entries
You may review the stored programming without making any
changes.
Going back to the operation mode
Two ways are available to go back to the operation mode:
(1) Lift the handset while in programming mode.
(2) When the Initial Message: SYS-PGM NO? –> is
displayed, press the PROGRAM button.
(To display the Initial Message, press END.)
4-8
System Programming
4.1.3 Entering Characters
You can enter characters to store names for speed dial numbers,
extension numbers, etc., by using the dialing key pad and the
buttons.
Each of twelve dialing keys on the dialing key pad has seven
characters assigned. See the Combination Tables below.
Step 2.
Press Soft 1
Step 1.
Press
(SHIFT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
#
Q
q
A
a
D
d
G
g
J
j
M
m
P
p
T
t
W
w
.
ä
/
$
%
Soft 2
Soft 3
(SHIFT)
Z
z
B
b
E
e
H
h
K
k
N
n
R
r
U
u
X
x
,
’
ö
+
&
=
(SHFT)
!
?
C
c
F
f
I
i
L
l
O
o
S
s
V
v
Y
y
:
;
ü
–
(
)
Pressing
SELECT
(Times)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
Q
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
W
q
a
d
g
j
m
p
t
w
.
/
%
Z
B
E
H
K
N
R
U
X
,
ö
&
z
b
e
h
k
n
r
u
x
’
+
=
!
C
F
I
L
O
S
V
Y
:
ü
(
?
c
f
i
l
o
s
v
y
;
–
)
Keys
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
#
ä
$
Combination Table 2
Combination Table 1
* Press SHIFT to alternate between Capital and
small letters.
System Programming
4-9
4.1.3 Entering Characters
To select a desired character, press the key which has.
For example, to select the letter “M”:
Select either of the following two methods:
(1) Using the SHIFT and Soft buttons (for display PT only)
* See Combination Table 1.
1. Press 6. (“M” belongs to “6.”)
• The Function Line shows: M N O
2. Press the Soft 1 (M) button.
(Press SHIFT to display the lower case of the above letters.)
(2) Using the SELECT button
* See Combination Table 2.
1. Press 6. (“M” belongs to “6.”)
2. Press the SELECT button once.
• Pressing the SELECT button an appropriate number of
times gives you the desired letter. Pressing SELECT
twice gives the letter “m,” pressing three times gives “N,”
and so on.
Example of entering characters: to enter “Mike”:
Using method (1)
* See Combination Table 1.
The display shows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
4-10
System Programming
Enter 6.
6
M
N
M
N
G
H
g
h
g
h
j
k
j
k
d
Mik3
e
f
Press Soft 1 (M).
O
M
Enter 4.
O
M4
Press SHIFT.
I
M4
Press Soft 3 (i).
i
Mi
Enter 5.
i
Mi5
Press Soft 2 (k).
l
Mik
Enter 3.
l
4.1.3 Entering Characters
9.
Press Soft 2 (e).
d
Mike
e
f
Using method (2)
* See Combination Table 2.
The display shows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Notes
Enter 6.
Press SELECT.
Enter 4.
Press SELECT six times.
Enter 5.
Press SELECT four times.
Enter 3.
Press SELECT four times.
6
M
M4
Mi
Mi5
Mik
Mik3
Mike
• To erase all the letters, press CLEAR.
• To erase the last letter, press ←.
System Programming
4-11
4.1.4 Example of Programming
The following programming instructions suppose that you have
already entered programming mode and that you will employ
method (2) on page 4-8.
Example: Program [001] “System Speed Dialing Number Set”
Sample of Description
001
4.2 Manager Programming(2)
(1)
System Speed Dialing Number Set(3)
Description (4)
Used to program the System Speed Dial
numbers. These numbers are available
to all extension users. The stored
numbers are also applied to Caller ID
and Call Log, Incoming Features.
Selection (5)
• Speed dial number: 000 through 499
• Telephone number: 24 digits (max.)
Default(6)
All speed dial numbers – Not Stored.
(7)
Programming
1. Enter 001.(8)
Display: SPD Number Set(9)
2. Press NEXT.(10)
Display: SPD Code?->(11)
3. Enter a speed dial number.
To enter speed dial number 000,
you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 000:Not
Stored(12)
4. Enter a telephone number. (13)
To delete the current entry, press
CLEAR. (14)
To change the current entry, press
CLEAR and the new number.
5. Press STORE.(15)
6. To program another speed dial
number, press NEXT or PREV,
or SELECT and the desired
speed dial number.(16)
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6. (17)
8. Press END. (18)
Conditions (19)
4-12
• There is a maximum of 500 speed
dial numbers. Each speed dial
System Programming
Explanation
(1) Program address: This address is printed at the top
of every page to allow you to quickly find the
desired program.
(2) Running title: tells you which group the program
belongs to.
(3) Program title.
(4) Provides a more detailed description of the
program.
(5) Shows you choices that you can assign.
(6) Shows you the default (factory setting).
(7) Shows you programming procedures step by step.
• While programming, use the overlay.
• Before starting to program, enter the
programming mode. (See “Entering the
programming mode” on page 4-6.)
(8) Enter the program address.
(9) The display shows the program title. If your
telephone has soft buttons, the lower line shows
the functions that are currently assigned to them.
(10) Press either Soft 3 (NEXT) shown on the display
or the NEXT shown on the overlay.
(11) The message line advises you to enter a speed dial
number.
(12) If the telephone number has already been stored,
the number is displayed.
(13) Enter the telephone number that you want to store.
Your entry is displayed as you enter the digits.
(14) Pressing CLEAR erases the whole entry.
(15) Your entry is now stored.
The indicator lights red and confirmation tone lets
you know that the storage is completed.
(16) Select the best way for you to store another speed
dial number. Pressing the NEXT / PREV allows
you to select the next higher / lower speed dial
number. You can also keep pressing them until the
desired one is displayed. If you press SELECT
4.1.4 Example of Programming
Sample of Description
001
4.2 Manager Programming
System Speed Dialing Number Set (contd.)
number has a maximum of 24 digits.
The valid characters are 0 through
9,
and # keys, SECRET and –
(hyphen) buttons.
•
•
•
•
•
Feature References(20) Section 3, Features,
Call Log, Incoming
Caller ID
•
•
•
Explanation
and the desired speed dial number, the selected
code is displayed.
(17) You can continue to program another entry.
(18) After you have stored all your entries, finish this
program by pressing END. After pressing END
you can go to any program address you desire.
You can return to the Initial Message mode any
time by pressing END.
To go to the next lager program address, do not
press END but press Soft 1 (SKP+) or
VOLUME .
To go to the next smaller program address, do not
press END but press SHIFT + Soft 1 (SKP-) or
VOLUME .
(19) Tells you what you should notice or consider when
doing the programming.
(20) Lists all of the features related to the
programming. These features are described in
Section 3.
Programming Structure
Program Address Programming Group
[000] – [014]
Manager Programming
[100] – [128]
[200] – [215]
[301] – [310]
[400] – [428]
[500] – [517]
[600] – [617]
[800] – [814]
System Programming
Timer Programming
TRS Programming
CO Line Programming
COS Programming
Extension Programming
Resource Programming
[990] – [991]
Option Programming
Description
These programs may be accessed by the
system manager of the customer to meet
frequent changes requested by the customer.
Entire system programming.
Flexible system timer setting.
Assignment of Toll Restriction.
Setting of CO line and CO line values.
Setting of Class of Service (COS).
Setting of extension values.
Assignment of customer-supplied peripherals
connected to the system.
Used to answer the user’s requirements or
troubles, if needed.
System Programming
4-13
4.2
000
Manager Programming
Date and Time Set
NOTICE
It is assumed that you have read Section 4.1 “General Programming Instructions.” The use of
the soft buttons is discussed in the section, therefore we will not make any reference to them in
the following instructions. At any time the soft buttons can be used in place of the overlay
keys.
Description
Sets the current date and time.
Selection
•
•
•
•
•
•
Default
1 Jan ’94 SAT 00:00
Programming
1.
Day: 1 through 31
Month: Jan through Dec
Year: 00 through 99
Day of the week: SUN / MON / TUE / WED / THU / FRI / SAT
Hour: 00 through 23
Minute: 00 through 59
Enter 000.
Display: Day/Time Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: 1 Jan ’94 SAT
3.
Enter the day.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new day.
4.
Press →.
5.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed.
6.
Press →.
7.
Enter the year.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new year.
4-14
8.
Press →.
9.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired day of the week is
displayed.
10.
Press STORE.
System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
000
Date and Time Set (contd.)
11.
Press NEXT.
Display example: 00:00
12.
Enter the hour.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new hour.
13.
Press →.
14.
Enter the minute.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new minutes.
15.
Press STORE.
16.
Press END.
Conditions
• After changing an entry, you can press STORE. You do not have
to perform all of the rest of the steps.
• To go back to the previous field, press ← at steps 4 through 9 and steps
13 through 14.
• If you hear the alarm after pressing STORE, check that the date is
valid.
• The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
• The time is adjusted automatically, if the first outgoing call is made
after three o’clock each morning.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Display, Time and Date
System Programming
4-15
4.2
001
Manager Programming
System Speed Dialing Number Set
Description
Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers. These numbers
are available to all extension users. The stored numbers are also
applied to Caller ID and Call Log, Incoming Features.
Selection
• Speed dial number: 000 through 499
• Telephone number: 24 digits (max.)
Default
All speed dial numbers – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 001.
Display: SPD Number Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: SPD Code?–>
3.
Enter a speed dial number.
To enter speed dial number 000, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 000: Not Stored
4.
Enter a telephone number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
Conditions
4-16
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another speed dial number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and the desired speed dial number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of 500 speed dial numbers. Each speed dial
number has a maximum of 24 digits. The valid characters are 0
through 9, , and # keys, SECRET and – (hyphen) buttons.
– To store a hyphen, press the “–” button.
– To prevent the display of all or part of the number, press SECRET
before and after confidential parts of the number. The SECRET
button must always be entered in a pair. Or your entry is not
stored. (Refer to Section 3 “Secret Dialing.”)
System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
001
System Speed Dialing Number Set (contd.)
• If you are storing an external number, include the line access code
(default=0, 81 through 88) before the number. For Caller ID and Call
Log, Incoming feature; When – (hyphen) precedes a phone number, the
Caller ID check starts on the phone number. Example : 0 - 12345678
• If you are storing an account code, enter the account code before the
line access code. Example : 49 12345#0 - 12345678
(Refer to Section 3 “Account Code Entry.”)
• It is possible to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by
storing it in two speed dial numbers. A line access code should not be
stored in the second speed dial number.
• To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display,
press → or ←.
• Program [002] “System Speed Dialing Name Set” is used to give names
to speed dial numbers.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Log, Incoming
Caller ID
Special Features for KX-T7235 — System Speed Dialing
System Speed Dialing
Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
System Programming
4-17
4.2
002
Manager Programming
System Speed Dialing Name Set
Description
Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in
program [001] “System Speed Dialing Number Set.” The KXT7235 shows the stored name when performing System Speed
Dialing. The stored names are applied to the Caller ID and Call
Log – Incoming features.
Selection
• Speed dial number: 000 through 499
• Name: 10 characters (max.)
Default
All speed dial numbers – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 002.
Display: SPD Name Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: SPD Code?–>
3.
Enter a speed dial number.
To enter speed dial number 000, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 000: Not Stored
4.
Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another speed dial number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and the desired speed dial number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Speed dial numbers are programmed in program [001] “System
Speed Dialing Number Set.”
• There is a maximum of 500 names. Each name has a maximum of 10
characters.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Log, Incoming
Caller ID
Special Features for KX-T7235 — System Speed Dialing
System Speed Dialing
4-18
System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
003
Extension Number Set
Description
Assigns an extension number to each extension.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16 (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64 (-1 / -2)
(-1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Extension Number: 2 through 4 digits
Default
KX-TD816 – Jack 01-1 through 16-1 = 201 through 216
Jack 01-2 through 16-2 = 301 through 316
KX-TD1232 – Jack 01-1 through 64-1 = 201 through 264;
Jack 01-2 through 64-2 = 301 through 364
Programming
1.
Enter 003.
Display: EXT Number Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack No?–>
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display: #01-1:EXT201
4.
Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
Conditions
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of 32 extension numbers for KX-TD816 and 128
extension numbers for KX-TD1232. Each extension number can be
two, three, or four digits, consisting of 0 through 9. The and # keys
cannot be used.
• In case of KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master
System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
System Programming
4-19
4.2
003
Manager Programming
Extension Number Set (contd.)
• An extension number is invalid if the leading first or second digits
disagree with the setting of the program [100] “Flexible Numbering, 1st
through 16th hundred extension blocks.” If one digit is assigned as the
leading digit, some extensions have two digits and some have three
digits. If two digits are assigned, some have three digits and some have
four digits.
• Two extension numbers can be assigned per jack. If XDP is disabled
for the jack in program [600] “EXtra Device Port,” the extension
number of the second part (XX-2) is not available. (XX=jack number)
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• Double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the assignment
of programs [012] “ISDN Extension Number Set”, [127] “ Voice Mail
Extension Number Assignment” and [813] “Floating Number
Assignment.” Valid entry examples: 10 and 11; 10 and 110. Invalid
entry examples: 10 and 106; 210 and 21.
• Program [004] “Extension Name Set” is used to give names to
extension numbers.
Feature References
4-20
Section 3, Features,
EXtra Device Port (XDP)
Intercom Calling
Special Features for KX-T7235 — Extension Dialing
System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
004
Extension Name Set
Description
Assigns names to the extension numbers programmed in program
[003] “Extension Number Set.”
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16 (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64 (-1 / -2)
(-1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Name: 10 characters (max.)
Default
All jacks – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 004.
Display: EXT Name set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display: #01-1:Not Stored
4.
Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
Conditions
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of 32 names for KX-TD816 and 128 names for
KX-TD1232. Each name has a maximum of 10 characters.
• Program [003] “Extension Number Set” is used to assign extension
numbers.
System Programming
4-21
4.2
004
Manager Programming
Extension Name Set (contd.)
• In case of KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master
System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
Feature References
4-22
Section 3, Features,
Intercom Calling
Special Features for KX-T7235 — Extension Dialing
System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
005
Flexible CO Button Assignment
Description
Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on proprietary
telephones from a centralized telephone.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64
• Button Code (plus parameter, if required):
Button Code
0 (Single-CO)
1 (DSS)
2 (One-Touch)
3 (Message Waiting)
4 (FWD/DND)
5 (Save)
6 (Account)
7 (Conference)
80 (Log-In/Log-Out)
81 (Hurry-Up)
82 (Voice Mail Transfer)
83 (Two-Way Record)†
84 (Two-Way Transfer)†
85 (Live Call Screening)†
86 (Live Call Screening Cancel)†
87 (Alert)
9 (Terminate)
(Loop-CO)
# (Group-CO)
CO (ringer frequency)
Parameter
KX-TD816: 01 through 08 (CO line number)
KX-TD1232: 01 through 24 (CO line number)
2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
16 digits max. (Telephone number)
None
None
None
None
None
None
2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
None
None
None
None
None
1 through 8 (CO line group number)
1 through 8 (ring tone type number)
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to
a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming
4-23
4.2
005
Manager Programming
Flexible CO Button Assignment (contd.)
Default
KX-TD816
For KX-T7230
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 8 =Single-CO 01 through 08;
Ring tone type 2
9 through 24 = Not stored.
For KX-T7235
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 8 =Single-CO 01 through 08;
Ring tone type 2
9 through 12 = Not stored.
ForKX-T7250
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 6=Single-CO 01 through 06;
Ring tone type 2
KX-TD1232
For KX-T7230
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 24 =Single-CO 01 through 24;
Ring tone type 2
For KX-T7235
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 12 =Single-CO 01 through 12;
Ring tone type 2
ForKX-T7250
All jacks CO buttons 1 through 6=Single-CO 01 through 06;
Ring tone type 2
Programming
1.
Enter 005.
Display: Flexible key Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display: PT-PGM Mode
4.
Press a CO button to be changed.
The display shows the contents pre-assigned to the button.
Display example: CO-01
5.
Enter a button code (plus parameter, if required).
To change the parameter, press CLEAR and the new parameter.
6.
4-24
System Programming
Press STORE.
4.2
Manager Programming
005
Flexible CO Button Assignment (contd.)
7.
• To program another CO button of the same jack, repeat
steps 4 through 6.
• To program another jack, press SELECT and repeat steps 3
through 6.
Cancelling
8.
Press END.
1.
Perform the same procedures as steps 1 through 4 above.
2.
Enter 2.
3.
Press STORE.
4.
Press END.
Conditions
• A centralized telephone is a telephone connected to jack 01 or a jack
programmed as a manager extension in program [006] “Operator /
Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night.”
• In case of the KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• If you press the same CO button again at step 5, you can select a desired
ringer frequency for the CO button from eight types of ring tone. When
you enter the tone type number (1 through 8), you will hear the selected
tone type until STORE is pressed. This selection is possible only for
the CO buttons that have been assigned to Single-CO, Group-CO, or
Loop-CO.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Button, Flexible
Buttons on Proprietary Telephones
System Programming
4-25
4.2
006
Manager Programming
Operator / Manager Extension Assignment – Day / Night
Description
Assigns the jack number for a manager and / or operators. The
manager extension can perform System Programming. An operator
has the ability to perform operator services.
Selection
• OP-1 (operator 1) (Day / Night) / OP-2 (operator 2) (Day /
Night)/ MNGER (manager)
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64
Default
Operator 1 (Day / Night) – Port 01
Operator 2 – Not stored
Manager – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 006.
Display: Operator/Manager
2.
Press NEXT to program Operator 1 in Day mode.
Display: OP-1– Day:Jack01
To program another item, you can also keep pressing NEXT or PREV
until the desired one is displayed.
3.
Enter a jack number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new jack number.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
To program another item, press NEXT or PREV.
6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5.
7.
Press END.
Conditions
• Up to two operators and a manager can be programmed.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• The manager cannot be assigned the jack number of the DSS Console
Port set in program [007] “DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone
Assignment.”
• If the assigned jack is in eXtra Device Port mode, the proprietary
telephone jack is treated as the manager / operator extension.
• If there is no operator or manager, press CLEAR at step 3.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Manager Extension
4-26
System Programming
Operator
4.2
Manager Programming
007
DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment
Description
Assigns the jack numbers for the DSS Console and the paired
extension.
Selection
• DSS Console number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 04
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 08 (for Master),
09 through 16 (for Slave)
• Jack number for DSS Console: KX-TD816 – 02 through 16
KX-TD1232 – 02 through32 (for
Master),
33 through 64 (for
Slave)
• Jack number for paired extension: KX-TD816 – 01through 16
KX-TD1232 – 01 through32
(for Master),
33 through 64
(for Slave)
Default
All DSS Consoles – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 007.
Display: DSS Console Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: DSS NO?–>
3.
Enter a DSS Console number.
To enter DSS Console number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: DSS-01:#
4.
P:#
Enter a jack number for the console.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new jack number.
5.
Press →.
6.
Enter a jack number for the paired extension.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new jack number.
Display example: DSS-01:#02 P:#03
7.
Press STORE.
System Programming
4-27
4.2
007
Manager Programming
DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment (contd.)
8.
To program another DSS Console, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired DSS Console number.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10.
Press END.
Conditions
• The jack number for the Console and that for the paired extension must
be entered together.
• Multiple DSS Consoles cannot be assigned to the same DSS Console
jack.
• Multiple DSS Consoles can be paired with the same proprietary
telephone jack.
• A DSS Console jack cannot be assigned the jack 01 and the jack
number of Manager set in program [006] “Operator / Manager
Extension Assignment — Day/Night.”
• If all incoming outside calls are set to ring at the operator extension
telephone in program [407]–[408] “DIL 1:1 Extension — Day /
Night,” assigning the DSS Consoles to the operator extension makes the
operator’s job much easier.
• If a DSS Console - assigned jack is programmed for eXtra Device Port,
an SLT can be connected to the jack in parallel with the console.
• If an SLT is assigned as the pair extension, the paired DSS Console will
not function.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
DSS Console (KX-T7240)
4-28
System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
008
Absent Messages
Description
Used to program the absent messages. An absent message, if set by
the extension user, is displayed on the calling extension’s telephone
to show the reason for the user’s absence.
Selection
• Message number: 1 through 9
• Message: 16 characters (max.)
Default
1: Will Return Soon
2: Gone Home
3: At EXT %%%
4: Back at %%:%%
Programming
1.
5: Out Until %%/%%
6: In a Meeting
7 through 9: Blank (not stored)
Enter 008.
Display: Message Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: MSG NO?–>
3.
Enter a message number.
To enter message number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: MSG1:Will Return
4.
Enter the message.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new message.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another message, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired message number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• There is a maximum of nine messages. Messages 1 through 6 are
programmed at the factory but can be changed. Each message has a
maximum of 16 characters.
• You can enter a maximum of seven “%” characters per message which
can be programmed at each user’s station. The station user can enter 0
through 9, and # for the % characters. If the user enters digits less
than the number of “%” characters, it is recommended to fill the
remaining “%” characters with “#” or “ .”
• If there are 4-digit extension numbers available in your system, add one
“%” to Message 3.
• To display parts of the message which have scrolled off the display,
press → or ←.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Absent Message Capability
System Programming
4-29
4.2
009
Manager Programming
Emergency Dial Number Set
Description
Assigns emergency call numbers.
Selection
• Emergency dial number: 1 through 8
• Telephone number: 16 digits (max.)
Default
Dial number 1 : 0117
Dial number 2 : 0118
Dial number 3 : 0144
Dial number 4-8 : Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 009.
Display: Emergency Dial
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Emergency NO?–>
3.
Enter an emergency dial number.
To enter emergency number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 1:0110
4.
Enter a telephone number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another emergency dial number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and the desired emergency dial
number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• There is a maximum of eight emergency call numbers. Each number
has a maximum of 16 digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
• No restriction is applied to emergency call numbers.
• For outside calls, enter a line access code (0, 81 through 88) before the
phone number.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Emergency Call
4-30
System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
010
Budget Management
Description
Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the extension basis.
Selection
• Jack number : KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (–1 / –2)
( =all jacks, –1= first part, –2= second part)
• Charge limitation (Charge): 0 through 9999
Default
All jacks – 0
Programming
1.
Enter 010.
Display: Charge Limit
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #01–1: 0FR
4.
Enter a charge limitation.
To delete the charge limitation, press CLEAR.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• If the charge limitation is set “0,” no restriction is applied.
• To assign all jack number to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack01.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by [125]
Assignment of Denomination.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Budget Management
Charge Fee Reference
System Programming
4-31
4.2
011
Manager Programming
Charge Margin and Tax Rate
Description
Assigns the margin rate of a telephone charge and the tax rate to the
total charge. This program is used for printing out the total charge
when a guest checks out.
Selection
Margin (%): 0 through 999
Tax (%): 0 through 99
Default
Margin : 0%, Tax : 0%
Programming
1.
Enter 011.
Display: Charge Margin
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Marg,Tax: 0, 0%
3.
Enter a charge margin rate.
To delete the charge limitation, press CLEAR.
4.
Press →.
5.
Enter a tax rate.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
Press END.
Conditions
None
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
HOTEL APPLICATION – Check-In / Check-Out
4-32
System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
012
ISDN Extension Number Set
Description
Assigns an extension number to each port which is connected to the
ISDN S0 unit or card.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12
• Extension Number: 1 through 3 digits
Default
All ports – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 012.
Display: ISDN EXT.Num Set
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display: #03:Not Stored
4.
Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
Conditions
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT
and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• Each extension number can be one, two or three digits, consisting of 0
through 9. The and # keys cannot be used.
• A multiple subscriber number (MSN) is determined regarding to this
assignment. The MSN consists of the assigned extension number and an
additional digit, 0 through 9.
Example) In case that the ISDN extension number is assigned “3”;
30 through 39 are effective as MSN's. The extension user can call any
terminal equipment on the ISDN S0 bus with MSN individually.
Pressing “30” calls all extensions on the ISDN S0 bus simultaneously.
System Programming
4-33
4.2
012
Manager Programming
ISDN Extension Number Set (contd.)
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• An extension number is invalid if the leading first or second digits
disagree with the setting of the program [100] “Flexible Numbering, 1st
through 16th hundred extension blocks.” If one digit is assigned as the
leading digit, some extensions have two digits and some have three
digits. If two digits are assigned, some have three digits and some have
four digits.
• Double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the assignment
of program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.” Valid entry
examples: 10 and 11; 10 and 110. Invalid entry examples: 10 and 106;
210 and 21.
• Program [013] “ISDN Extension Name Set” is used to give names to
the extension numbers.
Feature References
4-34
Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
System Programming
4.2
Manager Programming
013
ISDN Extension Name Set
Description
Assigns names to the ISDN extension numbers programmed in
program [012] “ISDN Extension Number Set.”
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12
• Name: 10 characters (max.)
Default
All ports – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 013.
Display: ISDN EXT. Name
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display: #03:Not Stored
4.
Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
System Programming
4-35
4.2
014
Manager Programming
Budget Management on ISDN Port
Description
Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the ISDN port basis.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Charge limitation (Charge): 0 through 9999
Default
All ports – 0
Programming
1.
Enter 014.
Display: ISDN Charge Lim.
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03: 0 FR
4.
Enter a charge limitation.
To delete the charge limitation, press CLEAR.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• If the charge limitation is set “0,” no restriction is applied.
• To assign all port to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by [125]
Assignment of Denomination.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Budget management
ISDN Extension
Charge Fee Reference
4-36
System Programming
4.3
System Programming
100
Flexible Numbering
Description
Assigns the leading digits of extension numbers and feature
numbers for system features.
Selection
• Selection number: 01 through 77 (except 38) (See “Feature
Number List” on pages 4-38 and 4-39 for the
corresponding features.)
• Feature number: 1 or 2 digits (for selection numbers 01 through
16);
1 through 3 digits (for selection numbers 17
through 77)
Default
See “Feature Number List” on pages 4-38 and 4-39.
Programming
1.
Enter 100.
Display: FLX Numbering
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Select NO?–>
3.
Enter a selection number.
To enter selection number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01. 1-EXT BL:2
4.
Enter the feature number.
To delete the feature number, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another selection, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired selection number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
To remove all the feature numbers except selection numbers
(01) through (16) 1st through 16th extension blocks;
1.
Enter 100.
2.
Press NEXT.
System Programming
4-37
4.3
100
System Programming
Flexible Numbering (contd.)
3.
Enter 00.
Display: All Feature CLR?
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• There is a maximum of 16 extension blocks and 59 feature numbers.
• Each extension block has one or two digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
Assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective
blocks.
• Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programs [003]
“Extension Number Set” and [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• To clear an extension block (01) through (16), it is required to change
the corresponding numbers assigned in program [003] “Extension
Number Set” and program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• Each feature number has one through three digits, consisting of 0
through 9, , and #.
• If or # is included in a feature number, dial pulse telephone users
cannot access the feature.
• Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid. Valid entry
example: 30 and 31, 210 and 211. Invalid entry example: 5 and 5, 30
and 301.
• If you delete a feature number, the feature cannot be used by dialing
operation.
• You can remove all the feature numbers except selections (01) through
(16).
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Flexible Numbering
Flexible Feature Numbers
4-38
Number
01
02
03 - 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
System Programming
Feature
1st hundred extension block
2nd hundred extension block
3rd through 16th hundred extension block
Operator call
Automatic line access
CO line group line access
System speed dialing
Station speed dialing
Station speed dialing programming
Doorphone call
Paging – external
Paging – external answer / TAFAS answer
Default
2
3
None
9
0
8
6
60
68
64
44
4.3
System Programming
100
Flexible Numbering (contd.)
Number
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64-68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76†
77
Feature
Paging – group
Paging – group answer
Call pickup, CO line
Call pickup, group
Call pickup, directed
Call hold
Hold retrieve – intercom
Hold retrieve – CO line
Last number redial
Call park / call park retrieve
Account code entry
Door opener
Station feature clear
Message waiting
External relay on
Call forwarding / do not disturb
Call pickup deny
External ringer
Call waiting
Executive busy override deny
Pickup dialing program
Absent message
Timed reminder
Electronic station lockout
Night service mode
Parallel telephone mode
Background music – external
Paging – deny
Primary COS select
Secondary COS select
UCD log-in / log-out
Operator 1 call
Operator 2 call
Automatic callback busy cancel
Emergency call 1
Emergency call 2
Emergency call 3
Emergency call 4 through 8
External ringer answer
Timed reminder remote
Call log, incoming
Do not disturb for DDI
CLIR
COLR
Call log lock control, incoming
Live Call Screening Password†
System working report printout / clear
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to
a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming
Default
63
43
4
40
41
50
51
53
#
52
49
55
790
70
67
710
720
730
731
733
74
750
76
77
78
69
65
721
791
793
45
61
62
46
117
118
144
None
47
7
54
56
57
58
59
799
794
4-39
4.3
101
System Programming
Language Assignment
Description
Assigns the language displayed on proprietary telephones.
Selection
GERMAN/FRENCH/ENGLISH
Default
GERMAN
Programming
1.
Enter 101.
Display: Language
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: German
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
None
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Multilingual
4-40
System Programming
4.3
102
System Programming
Day / Night Service Starting Time
Description
Sets the starting time on a day of the week basis, when automatic
day / night switching is selected.
Selection
• Day of the week selection number:
1 (Sunday) / 2 (Monday) / 3 (Tuesday) / 4 (Wednesday) /
5 (Thursday) / 6 (Friday) / 7 (Saturday) /
(every day of the
week)
• Hour: 0 through 23 / Disable (no switching)
• Minute: 0 through 59
Default
Every day of the week – Day – 9:00 / Night – 17:00
Programming
1.
Enter 102.
Display: Day/Night Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Day of Week?–>
3.
Enter the day of the week selection number.
To select Sunday, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: Sun-Day: 9:00
To select night mode, press NEXT one more time.
Display example: Sun-Night: 17:00
4.
Enter the hour.
To set no switching, keep pressing SELECT until “Disable” is
displayed and go to step 7.
If SELECT is pressed, the display shows the previous entry. If the
previous setting was “Disable,” press SELECT to enter the starting
time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
5.
Press →.
6.
Enter the minute.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new minutes.
7.
Press STORE.
System Programming
4-41
4.3
System Programming
102
Day / Night Service Starting Time (contd.)
8.
To program another day / night mode or day of the week,
press NEXT or PREV, or SELECT and the day of the
week selection number.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 10.
10.
Press END.
Conditions
• To select the desired day, you may keep pressing NEXT at step 3. To
assign every day of the week to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Sunday.
• If day / night switching is unwanted, select “Disable ” at step 4.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Night Service
4-42
System Programming
4.3
103
System Programming
Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment
Description
Assigns the sequence in which CO line groups will be accessed
when in Automatic Line Access mode. When a user dials the
feature number for automatic line access (default=0) or presses the
L-CO button, an idle line is hunted in the programmed CO line
group order.
Selection
CO line group number: 1 through 8,
eight entries (max.) in desired order
Default
12345678
Programming
1.
Enter 103.
Display: Local Access
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Access:12345678
3.
Enter the CO line group numbers in priority from top to
bottom.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new order.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
There is a maximum of eight CO line groups. Up to eight CO line group
numbers can be entered.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Line Access, Automatic
Line Access, Direct
Line Preference – Outgoing
System Programming
4-43
4.3
System Programming
105
Account Codes
Description
Assigns the account codes for Account Code Entry, Verified – All
Calls and Verified – Toll Restriction Override modes. If Verified –
All Calls is assigned in program [508] “Account Code Entry Mode,”
an account code is required to make an outside call. If Verified – Toll
Restriction Override is assigned, an account code is only required for
a toll call and overrides toll restriction.
Selection
• Location number: 01 through 40
• Account code: 5 digits (max.)
Default
All locations – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 105.
Display: Account Code
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?–>
3.
Enter a location number.
To enter location number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01:Not Stored
4.
Enter an account code.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new account code.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another location, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired location number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• There is a maximum of 40 verifiable account codes. Each code has a
maximum of 5 digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
• Program [508] “Account Code Entry Mode” is used to select the Account
Code Entry mode.
• Account codes having “99” in any part or ending with “9” are invalid, as
“99” is used as a delimiter when entering an account code.
• The location 01 of the entries is used as the account code for Private Call.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Account Code Entry
Private Call
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
4-44
System Programming
4.3
106
System Programming
Station Hunting Type
Description
Used to enable or disable hunting and set the Station Hunting type for
each extension group. There are five Station Hunting types available:
Circular, Termination, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), Voice Mail
(VM), and Automated Attendant (AA). If circular hunting is assigned
for a group, all the extensions in the group are hunted until an idle one
is found. If termination hunting is assigned, hunting stops at the
extension which has the largest jack number in the group. If VM
hunting is assigned, all the VM ports of an extension group are hunted
until an idle one is found to permit Voice Mail Service. If AA hunting
is assigned, all the AA ports of an extension group are hunted until an
idle one is found to permit AA Service. If UCD is assigned, group
members are hunted in circular way, starting at the extension following
the last one called.
Selection
• Extension group number: 1 through 8, ( =all extension groups)
• Disable (no hunting) / Terminate / Circular / UCD / VM / AA
Default
All extension groups – Disable
Programming
1.
Enter 106.
Display: Call Hunting
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: EXT GRP NO?–>
3.
Enter an extension group number.
To enter extension group number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: Group1:Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another extension group, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired extension group number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Program [602] “Extension Group Assignment” is used to assign the
extension group members.
• The system supports a maximum of eight jacks (16 jacks during System
Connection*) for connection to a Voice Processing System as Voice Mail or
Auto-Abfr ports.
• To assign all extension groups to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Group1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Station Hunting
Voice Mail Integration
4-45
System Programming
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
4.3
System Programming
107
System Password
Description
Assigns the password required for entering System Programming
mode and for maintenance from a personal computer.
Selection
Password: 4 through 7 digits
Default
1234
Programming
1.
Enter 107.
Display: System Password
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Password:1234
3.
Enter a password.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new password.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• The password can be from four to seven digits long. The valid numbers
are from 0 through 9.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer
System Programming with Proprietary Telephone
4-46
System Programming
4.3
108
System Programming
One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Description
Enables or disables the function of automatically holding the
outside call when a DSS button on the DSS Console or proprietary
telephone is pressed.
Selection
Enable/Disable
Default
Enable
Programming
1.
Enter 108.
Display: DSS Auto Hold
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Auto HLD:Enable
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
None
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
System Programming
4-47
4.3
109
System Programming
Expansion Card /Unit Type
Description
Assigns the type of expansion cards/units to be used in the Master
and Slave Systems. This allows the system to identify the card
and/or unit in each expansion location.
Selection
KX-TD816
• Master
• Areas 1; 2 = 1;2 (Expansion Area) :
S (2S0) / E1 (EXT1)
KX-TD1232
• Master / Slave
• Areas 1; 2; 3 =1;2;3 (Expansion Area) :
S (2S0) / E1 (EXT1) / E2 (EXT2)
Default
KX-TD816 – S; N1
KX-TD1232 – Master and Slave – S; E1; E2
Programming
1.
Enter 109.
Display: Expansion Card
2.
Press NEXT to program Master System.
To program “Slave,” press NEXT twice.
Display example: Mast.: S; E1; E2
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press →.
5.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the all the required entries are
completed.
7.
Press STORE.
If only one system is in operation, go to step 8.
8.
Press NEXT to program Slave System.
Display example: Slav.: S; E1; E2
9.
4-48
System Programming
Repeat steps 3 through 7.
4.3
System Programming
109
Expansion Card /Unit Type
10.
(contd.)
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of starting the system for the first time or System Data Clear,
the application for location will adapt the practical installation instead
of system default setting.
• There are two expansion areas on the KX-TD816, areas 1 and 2 from
bottom to top. There are three expansion area on the KX-TD1232, area
1, 2 and 3 from bottom to top.
• If the Slave System is out-of-service or in case of KX-TD816, skip the
steps 8 and 9.
• After changing the setting, to make your setting effective, unplug the
system once and plug it in again. Otherwise the previous setting will
be maintained.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Module Expansion
System Programming
4-49
4.3
110
System Programming
Network Type Assignment
Description
Assigns the type of ISDN network.
Selection
· EURO/NET2/NET3
Default
NET2
Programming
1.
Enter 110.
Display:
2.
Network Type
Press NEXT.
Display example:
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
None
Feature References
None
4-50
NET2
System Programming
4.3
System Programming
111
DDI Removed Digit /Added Number Assignment
Description
Assigns the removed digits and added number to a subscriber's
number and the DDI number sent from the network to make the
extension which receives a call.
Selection
· Removed digit:
· Added number:
Default
Removed digit — 0; Added number — not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 111.
Display:
2.
0 through 16 (0=no deleting)
4 digits (max.)
DDI Remove/Add
Press NEXT.
Display example: RMV/ADD: 0,
3.
Enter the digit(s) to be deleted.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
4.
Press →.
Display example: RMV/ADD: 3,
5.
Enter the number(s) to be added.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
Conditions
6.
Press STORE.
7.
Press END.
Example:
If the removed digits are assigned “6” and the added number is assigned
“ 2”, the number sent from the network is changed as follows:
85492603 (DDI number :2 digits)
Six digits are deleted and “2” is added, and the number becomes “203”.
Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Dialing In (DDI)
System Programming
4-51
4.3
112
System Programming
DDI Number for Operator Assignment
Description
Assigns the DDI number for an operator.
Selection
· DDI number: 4 digits (max.)
Default
0
Programming
1.
Enter 112.
Display:
2.
Operator DDI No.
Press NEXT.
Display example: DDI Number: 0
3.
Enter the DDI number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
· You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features
Direct Dialing In (DDI)
4-52
System Programming
4.3
System Programming
113
VM Status DTMF Set
Description
Sets the DTMF signals transmitted to your Voice Processing
System (VPS) to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly.
The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF
signals:
RBT (ringback tone)
: This signal is sent when calling an
extension.
BT (busy tone)
: This is sent when the called extension
is busy.
ROT (reorder tone) :
This is sent when the dialed number is
invalid.
DND (DND tone)
:
This is sent when the other extension
has DND assigned.
Answer
: This is sent when the other extension
answers the call.
Disconnect
: This is sent when the other extension
hangs up.
Confirm (confirmation tone) :
This is sent when the feature number
for “Message Waiting Lamp” is valid.
FWD VM RBT (FWD to VM ringback tone) :
Not available (reserved).
FWD VM BT(FWD to VM busy tone) :
This is sent when the called extension
has set Call Forwarding to VPS.
FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone) :
Not available (reserved).
Selection
• RBT / BT / ROT / DND / Answer / Disconnect / Confirm /
FWD VM RBT/ FWD VM BT / FWD EXT RBT
• DTMF signal number: 3 digits (max.)
Default
RBT – 1; BT – 2; ROT – 3; DND – 4; Answer – 5; Disconnect –
#9; Confirm – 9; FWD VM RBT – 6; FWD VM BT – 7; FWD
EXT RBT– 8
Programming
1.
Enter 113.
System Programming
4-53
4.3
113
System Programming
VM Status DTMF Set (contd.)
Display: Voicemail Status
2.
Press NEXT to program ringback tone status.
To program another status, keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the
desired status is displayed.
Display example: RBT
3.
:1
Enter a DTMF signal number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
To program another selection, keep pressing NEXT or PREV
until the desired selection is displayed.
6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5.
7.
Press END.
Conditions
• A DTMF signal number can have a maximum of three digits, consisting
of 0 through 9, , # and PAUSE.
• The DTMF signals are sent to the extensions in the extension group that
is assigned as “VM” or “AA” in program [106] “Station Hunting Type.”
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration
4-54
System Programming
4.3
System Programming
114
VM Command DTMF Set
Description
Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice
Processing System (VPS). There are four commands available:
Leave Message; Get Message; Automated Attendant Service; Voice
Mail Service. These commands are used in the following ways:
(A) If your VPS is used for Voice Mail (VM) Service
(1) Call Forwarding / Intercept Routing to Voice Mail
If a call is forwarded to the VPS, your system will send a mailbox
number to the VM port. This allows the caller to leave a message
without knowing the mailbox number.
• Required entries (selections):
LV-MSG (Leave Message): This command is transmitted to a
VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the
port.
AA-SVC (Automated Attendant Service): If AA Service is set to
“Start” in program [990], field (10), the “AA-SVC” command is
sent to a VM port if an incoming outside call is answered by the
VM port.
• Other programming required (program addresses): [106]; [602];
[609]; [990], field (10); [990], field (18)
(2) Hearing the message at the extension
If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button
indicator of the concerned telephone, the telephone user can hear
the message by pressing the MESSAGE button.
• Required entries (selections):
GETMSG (Get Message): This command is transmitted to a VM
port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button.
VM-SVC (Voice Mail Service): The “VM-SVC” command is a
code transmitted preceding the “GETMSG” command above.
This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the
MESSAGE indicator.
• Other programming required (program addresses): [609]; [990],
field (18)
(B) If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant (AA) Service
An AA port answers an incoming outside call to provide AA
services, such as call transfer, receiving a message.
• Required entries (selections):
VM-SVC (Voice Mail Service): The “VM-SVC” command is a
code transmitted before “LV-MSG” code if Operator transfers a
call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that
the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily.
• Other programming required (program addresses): [106], [602]
System Programming
4-55
4.3
114
System Programming
VM Command DTMF Set (contd.)
Selection
• LV-MSG/ GETMSG/ AA-SVC / VM-SVC
• DTMF signal number: 16 digits (max.)
Default
LV-MSG – H; GETMSG –
Programming
1.
H; AA-SVC– #8 ; VM-SVC – #6
Enter 114.
Display: VM Command Set
2.
Press NEXT to program the Nachr. command.
To program another command, keep pressing NEXT until the desired
command is displayed.
Display example: LV-MSG:H
3.
Enter a DTMF signal number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
To program another selection, keep pressing NEXT or PREV
until the desired selection is displayed.
6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5.
7.
Press END.
Conditions
• A command signal number can have a maximum of 16 digits,
consisting of 0 through 9, , #, FLASH and PAUSE.
• The FLASH button is available only for LV-MSG and GETMSG
commands to store “H” which means “Home Position.”
• If “H” is stored for “Nachr.,” a mailbox number programmed in
program [609] “Voice Mail Access Codes” or an extension number will
be sent to the VM port (Follow On ID function). If certain codes are
required before and after the ID code, insert “H” between the codes, as
“aaaHbbb.” If nothing is stored, it will operate as “H.”
• If “ H” is stored for “Hol.N.,” a mailbox number programmed in
program [609] “Voice Mail Access Codes” or an extension number will
be sent to the port succeeding the “ .”
• To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display,
press → or ←.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration
4-56
System Programming
4.3
System Programming
115
Adjust Time*
Description
Used to synchronize the time between the Master and the Slave
Systems. Every day at the programmed time, system clock and
data adjustment are performed between the two systems, if
available.
Selection
• Hour: 0 through 23
• Minute: 00 through 59
Default
1:00
Programming
1.
Enter 115.
Display: Adjust Time
2.
Press NEXT to program hour.
Display example: 1:00
3.
Enter the hour.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new hour.
4.
Press → to program minute.
5.
Enter the Minute.
To change the current entry, enter the new minute.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
Press END.
Conditions
You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
System Connection
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
System Programming
4-57
4.3
116
System Programming
ROM Version Display
Description
Confirms the version of the ROM of the system.
Display example: P061A50101A
Version
Date
Selection
System Number: KX-TD816 – 0
KX-TD1232 – 0 (Master) / 1 (Slave)
Default
Not applicable.
Programming
1.
Enter 116.
Display: ROM Version
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: System NO?->
3.
Enter the System Number.
The display shows the ROM version of the specified system.
4.
To confirm the other system, press SELECT and enter the
System Number.
The display shows the ROM version of the specified system.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• The out-of-service system number is unacceptable.
• In case of the KX-TD816, skip the step 4.
Feature References
None
4-58
System Programming
4.3
System Programming
117
Charge Display Selection
Description
Assigns the initial display format of charge fee.
Selection
Meter / in FR
Default
Meter
Programming
1.
Enter 117.
Display: Charge Meter
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Meter
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
None
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Charge Fee Reference
Display, Call Information
System Programming
4-59
4.3
118
System Programming
Charge Verification Assignment
Description
Assigns the extension which is allowed to refer or clear for the call
information on the extension, CO line, department code, account
code, and the total.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64,
( =all jack number)
• Enable / Disable
Default
All jacks - Enable
Programming
1.
Enter 118.
Display: Charge Refer EXT
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO? ->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #01:Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, Jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the slave, if available, jack
numbers in the out-out-service system are unacceptable.
• To assign all jack numbers to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack01.
Feature Reference
Section 3, Features,
Charge Fee Reference
4-60
System Programming
4.3
System Programming
119
Charge Verification ID Code Set
Description
Assigns an ID code required to refer the charge information.
Selection
4 digits (0000 through 9999)
Default
1234
Programming
1.
Enter 119.
Display: Charge ID Code
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Code: 1234
3.
Enter an ID code.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
None
Feature Reference
Section 3, Features,
Charge Fee Reference
System Programming
4-61
4.3
120
System Programming
Operator Queue
Description
Assigns the limited number of queue and the number of Hurry-Up.
Selection
• Queue: 0 through 8
• Number of Hurry-Up : 0 through 7
Default
Queue : 8, H-UP : 4
Programming
1.
Enter 120.
Display: Operator Queue
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Queue:8, H-UP: 4
3.
Enter a queue.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
4.
Press →.
5.
Enter a number of Hurry-Up.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
Press END.
Conditions
The queue should be longer than the number of Hurry-Up.
Feature Reference
Section 3, Features,
Automatic Overflow and Hurry-Up Transfer
4-62
System Programming
4.3
System Programming
121
Pulse Dial Reception Assignment
Description
Assigns whether the pulse dial from the extension can be received
or not by the system.
Selection
Puls : Enable / Puls : Disable
Default
Puls : Enable
Programming
1.
Enter 121.
Display: Ext Pulse Dial
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Ext Puls:Enable
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
None
Feature Reference
Section 3, Features,
Mixed Station Capacities
System Programming
4-63
4.3
122
System Programming
Automatic Door Open Assignment
Description
Assigns whether the door is automatically unlocked or not, when
pressing Call button.
Selection
• KX-TD816 – T1 – Day / T1 – Night
KX-TD1232 – T1 – Day / T1 – Night / T2 – Day / T2 – Night
(T1: Doorphone 1, T2: Doorphone 2)
• Enable/Disable
Default
All selections: Not stored.
Programming
1.
Enter 122.
Display: Auto. Door Open
2.
Press NEXT to program D1–Day.
To program another status, keep pressing NEXT until the desired one
is displayed.
Display example: D1-Day: Disable
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
To program another selection press NEXT or PREV until the
desired selection is displayed.
6.
Repeat steps 3 and 4.
7.
Press END.
Conditions
This programming is applied to the doorphone which provides the door
opener.
Feature Reference
Section 3, Features,
Door Opener
4-64
System Programming
4.3
System Programming
123
Hotel Application
Description
Assigns whether the hotel application is enabled or disabled.
Selection
Disable/Enable
Default
Disable
Programming
1.
Enter 123.
Display: Hotel Apply Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Hotel : Disable
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
If “Enable” is selected, the menu “Hotel” is displayed on the operator
extension’s KX-T7235 and “Check–In / Check–Out” feature is available.
Feature Reference
Section 3, Features,
HOTEL APPLICATION
System Programming
4-65
4.3
125
System Programming
Assignment of Denomination
Description
Assigns the Denomination required for your country.
Selection
2 characters (Max.)
Default
FR
Programming
1.
Enter 125.
Display:
2.
Denomination
Press NEXT.
Display example:
3.
denomi.: FR
Enter a denomination.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new
denomination.
To enter characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• If more than two digits are entered, they are ignored.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Display, Call Information
4-66
System Programming
4.3
System Programming
126
Voice Mail Number Assignment †
Description
Assigns the jack number corresponding to voice mail port for data
transmission to the Voice Processing System.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 02 through 16
KX-TD1232 – 02 through 64
Default
All jacks—Not Stored
Programming
1.
Enter 126.
Display:
2.
VMS Port Asn
Press NEXT to program Master System.
To program “Slave”, press NEXT again.
Display:
3.
Master:
#
#
#
Enter a jack number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new
denomination.
4.
Press →to enter the other jack number.
5.
Enter a jack number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new jack number.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter the other jack number.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
Press NEXT to program Slave System.
Display:
Conditions
Slave:
#
#
9.
Repeat steps 3 through 7 to enter jack number.
10.
Press END.
#
• A maximum of three jacks can be assigned per system.
• Neither the Jack number 01 nor manager extension can be assigned as
the jack of voice mail port. The jack of voice mail port cannot be
assigned to manager extension.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to
a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming
4-67
4.3
126
System Programming
Voice Mail Number Assignment † (contd.)
• The jack numbers correspond to the voice mail port in numerical order.
Example: Stored jack numbers: Jacks 02, 03, 05
Jack 02=Voice mail numbers 01, 02; Jack 03=Voice mail numbers 03,
04; Jack 05=Voice mail numbers 05, 06
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 02 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
Feature References
4-68
Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones
System Programming
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
4.3
System Programming
127
Voice Mail Number Assignment †
Description
Assigns the extension number for voice mail number. These
numbers can be used the same way extension numbers are used for
station access.
Selection
· Voice mail number: 01 through 12
· Extension Number: 2 through 4 digits
Default
VM-01=265, VM-02=266, VM-03=267, VM-04=268,
VM-05=269,VM-06=270, VM-07=271, VM-08=272,
VM-09=273, VM-10=274, VM-11=275, VM-12=276
Programming
1.
Enter 127.
Display:
2.
Press NEXT.
Display:
3.
VM EXT No. Set
VM NO?→
Enter a voice mail number.
To enter voice mail number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display:
4.
VM-01:#02-1:265
Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
Conditions
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
• Double entry and incompatible entry for the extension numbers are
invalid.
• The display shows “VM-XX:#YY-1:ZZZ” at step 3.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to
a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming
4-69
4.3
127
System Programming
Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment † (contd.)
“XX” means a voice mail number.
“YY” means the jack number of the voice mail port programmed in
[126].
“-1” of YY-1 means the first part of jack number in digital line.
YY-2 means the second number of the jack number in digital line.
Feature References
4-70
Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones
System Programming
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a
Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
4.3
System Programming
128
Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment †
Description
Assigns each voice mail number to a voice mail extension group
number.
Selection
• Voice mail number(VM):
01 through 12,
( = all voice mail numbers)
• Voice mail extension group number (EXG) = 1 through 8
Default
All voice mail numbers = EXG 1
Programming
1.
Enter 128.
Display:
2.
Press NEXT.
Display:
3.
VM EXT Group Asn
VM NO?→
Enter a voice mail number.
To enter voice mail number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: VM-01:#02-1:EXG1
4.
Enter the voice mail extension group number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another voice mail number, press NEXT or
PREV, or SELECT and desired voice processing mail
number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Display shows “VM-XX:#YY-1:EXG Z” at step 3.
“XX” means a voice mail number.
“YY” means the jack number of the voice mail port programmed in
[126].
“-1” of YY-1 means the first part of jack number in digital line.
“YY-2” means the second part of the jack number in digital line.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to
a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming
4-71
4.4
200
Timer Programming
Hold Recall Time
Description
Assigns the length of the hold recall timer. This timer is used to
alert an extension that a call has been held for an extended period
of time.
Selection
Time (seconds): 0 through 240
Default
60 s
Programming
1.
Enter 200.
Display: Hold Recall Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 60
3.
sec
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• Select “0” if Hold Recall is not required.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Hold Recall
4-72
System Programming
4.4
Timer Programming
201
Transfer Recall Time
Description
Sets the number of rings before the transfer recall occurs. If a
transferred call is not answered before the programmed time of
rings, the call returns to the original caller or to an operator.
Selection
Number of rings: 3 through 48
Default
12 rings
Programming
1.
Enter 201.
Display: Transfer Recall
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time:12 rings
3.
Enter the number of rings.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number of
rings.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• One ring is equivalent to five seconds.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Transfer, Unscreened – to Extension
System Programming
4-73
4.4
202
Timer Programming
Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
Description
Sets the number of rings for the Call Forwarding – No Answer
feature. If a call is not answered before the programmed number of
rings, the call is forwarded to the destination.
Selection
Number of rings: 1 through 12
Default
3 rings
Programming
1.
Enter 202.
Display: No Answer Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 3 rings
3.
Enter the number of rings.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number of
rings.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• One ring is equivalent to five seconds.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – Busy / No Answer
Call Forwarding – No Answer
4-74
System Programming
4.4
Timer Programming
203
Intercept Time
Description
Sets the number of rings for the Intercept Routing – No Answer
(IRNA) feature. If a call is not answered before the programmed
number of rings, the call is redirected to the programmed station.
Selection
Number of rings: 3 through 48
Default
12 rings
Programming
1.
Enter 203.
Display: Intercept Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time :12 rings
3.
Enter the number of rings.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number of
rings.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• One ring is equivalent to five seconds.
• Programs [409]–[410] “Intercept Extension — Day / Night” are used to
program the destination of Intercept Routing on a CO line group basis
in day and night modes.
• If the original extension has set Call Forwarding – No Answer,
Intercept Timer starts after the Call Forwarding.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Intercept Routing
System Programming
4-75
4.4
204
Timer Programming
Pickup Dial Waiting Time
Description
Sets the number of seconds for Pickup Dialing. If the telephone
user lifts the handset, the programmed party is called when the time
expires.
Selection
Time (seconds): 0 through 8
Default
1s
Programming
1.
Enter 204.
Display: Pickup Dial Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time :1 sec
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, enter the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
This time gives the user an opportunity to dial digits before the automatic
dialing process occurs.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Pickup Dialing
4-76
System Programming
4.4
Timer Programming
207
(Reserved For future use.) First Digit Time
Description
Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of outside dial
tone and the first digit dialed on an outgoing outside call. If an
extension user fails to dial any digits during this time, the DTMF
receiver is released.
Selection
Time (seconds): 5 through 120
Default
10 s
Programming
1.
Enter 207.
Display: 1st Digit Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 10 sec
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• This timer is used for toll restriction checking.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction
System Programming
4-77
4.4
208
Timer Programming
Inter Digit Time
Description
Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing
toll call. If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this
time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer applies until the
Toll Restriction check is completed.
Selection
Time (seconds): 5 through 30
Default
10 s
Programming
1.
Enter 208.
Display: Inter Digit Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time: 10 sec
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• This timer is used for toll restriction checking.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction
4-78
System Programming
4.4
Timer Programming
209
Automatic Redial Repeat Times
Description
Sets the number of times Automatic Redial is tried. Automatic
redialing of the last dialed or saved number is done up to the
specified number of times.
Selection
Number of times: 1 through 12
Default
5
Programming
1.
Enter 209.
Display: Redial Times
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Attempt:10
3.
Enter the number of times.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number of
times.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• Program [210] “Automatic Redial Interval Time” is used to set the
interval time between Automatic Redial attempts.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Redial, Automatic
System Programming
4-79
4.4
210
Timer Programming
Automatic Redial Interval Time
Description
Sets the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts.
Selection
Time (seconds): 6 through 120 (×10 is the actual time)
Default
6 (60 seconds)
Programming
1.
Enter 210.
Display: Interval Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Time:
3.
60 sec
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
• You enter a number from 6 through 120. The actual time is 10 times
your input.
• Program [209] “Automatic Redial Repeat Times” is used to set the
number of times Automatic Redial is tried.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Redial, Automatic
4-80
System Programming
4.4
Timer Programming
213
External Relay Connecting Time
Description
Set the connecting time to hold the external relay on.
Selection
• Master / Slave*
• Time (seconds) : 0 through 99
Default
5 sec
Programming
1.
Enter 213.
Display: Ext Relay Time
2.
Press NEXT.
To program “Slave,” press NEXT twice.
Display example: Time-1: 5 sec
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, enter the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press NEXT to program Slave System.
Display example: Time-1: 5 sec
6.
Repeat steps 3 and 4.
7.
Press END.
Conditions
• If “0” is assigned, the system will hold the external relay on until the
controlling telephone is on-hooked.
• If the Slave System is out-of-service or in case of the KX-TD816, skip
the steps 5 and 6.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
External Relay
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
System Programming
4-81
4.4
214
Timer Programming
Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
Description
Set the interval time of Message Waiting ring for a single line
telephone.
Selection
Time (minutes) : 0 through 64
Default
10 min
Programming
1.
Enter 214.
Display: MW Ring Time
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Interval: 10 min
3.
Enter the time.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and enter the new time.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
When the internal time is set “0,” the telephone does not ring for Message
Waiting notification.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Message Waiting
4-82
System Programming
4.5
TRS Programming
301-305
TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
Description
These allow you to specify the numbers which are toll-restricted for
each toll restriction level as follows:
Program [301]: restricts levels 2 through 6
Program [302]: restricts levels 3 through 6
Program [303]: restricts levels 4 through 6
Program [304]: restricts levels 5 through 6
Program [305]: restricts level 6
Selection
• Location number: 01 through 20
• Toll call number: 7 digits (max.)
Default
Location 01 in program [301]:
All other locations – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter a program address (301 through 305).
Display example: TRS Deny LVL-2
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?–>
3.
Enter a location number.
To enter location number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01:
4.
Enter a toll call number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another location, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired location number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• There is a maximum of 20 toll call numbers which can be restricted for
each program. Each number has a maximum of seven digits, consisting
of 0 through 9, and . The character “ ” can be used as a wild card
character.
• Programs [306]–[310] “TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through
6” are used to assign exceptions to these numbers. Programs
[500]–[501] “Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night” are used to set the
toll restriction value for each COS.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction
System Programming
4-83
306-310
4.5
TRS Programming
TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6
Description
These allow you to assign numbers which are exceptions to the toll
restriction specified in programs [301] through [305] as follows:
Program [306]: applies to level 2
Program [307]: applies to levels 2 through 3
Program [308]: applies to levels 2 through 4
Program [309]: applies to levels 2 through 5
Program [310]: applies to levels 2 through 6
Selection
• Location number: 01 through 20
• Exceptional number: 7 digits (max.)
Default
All locations – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter a program address (306 through 310).
Display example: TRS Excp LVL-2
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Location NO?->
3.
Enter a location number.
To enter location number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: 01:Not Stored
4.
Enter an exceptional number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another location, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired location number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
There is a maximum of 20 numbers for each program. Each number has
a maximum of seven digits, consisting of 0 through 9, and . The
character “ ” can be used as a wild card character.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction
4-84
System Programming
4.6
400
CO Line Programming
CO Line Connection Assignment
Description
Used to identify the CO lines which are connected to the system.
This prevents users from originating a call to a line which is not
connected.
Selection
• CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 8,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Connect/No Connect
Default
All CO lines – Connect
Programming
1.
Enter 400.
Display: Connection
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Connect
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment
System Programming
4-85
4.6
CO Line Programming
401
CO Line Group Assignment
Description
Each CO line must be assigned to a CO line group. This program
defines the CO line group assignment for each CO line. For
example, if there are multiple telephone service companies
available, the CO lines can be grouped by company.
Selection
• CO line (CO) number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• CO line group (TRG) number: 1 through 8
Default
CO01 – TRG 1;
CO02 – TRG 2;
CO03 – TRG 3;
CO04 – TRG 4;
Programming
1.
CO05 – TRG 5;
CO06 – TRG 6;
CO07 – TRG 7;
CO08 – TRG 8 (for KX-TD816)
CO08 through CO24 – TRG 8 (for KX-TD1232)
Enter 401.
Display : Trunk Group Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: TRG1
4.
Enter the CO line group number.
To change the current entry, enter the new CO line group number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one CO line group, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
CO Line Group
4-86
System Programming
4.6
407-408
CO Line Programming
DIL I:1 Extension-Day/Night
Description
The Direct In Lines (DIL) 1:1 feature allows incoming outside calls
to be directed to a specific extension. When a CO line is assigned
as DIL 1:1, it is necessary to assign the destination. These
programs specify the extension number for day or night mode.
Selection
• CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Extension number: 2 through 4 digits / Disable (no DIL 1:1)
Default
All CO lines – Disable — Day / Night
Programming
1.
Enter a program address (407 for day or 408 for night).
Display example: DIL 1: 1 Asn Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Disable
4.
Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
To disable DIL 1:1, press CLEAR.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• You set the extension numbers in program [003] “Extension Number
Set” or floating numbers of external ringer, pagers, UCD and the
modem in program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• If a CO line is also programmed for DIL 1:N in program [603]–[604]
“DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night,” it is
regarded as a DIL 1:1 line.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Direct In Lines (DIL)
Night Service
System Programming
4-87
4.6
CO Line Programming
409-410
Intercept Extension-Day/Night
Description
Intercept Routing provides an automatic re-direction of calls which
cannot or have not been answered. These programs set the
destination in both day and night modes for each line group.
Selection
• CO line group (TRG) number: 1 through 8,
( =all CO line groups)
• Extension number: 2 through 4 digits / Disable (no Intercept
Routing)
Default
All CO line groups – Disable — Day / Night
Programming
1.
Enter a program address (409 for day or 410 for night).
Display example: TRG Intercept Nig
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: TRK GRP NO?–>
3.
Enter the CO line group number.
To enter CO line group number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: TRG1: Disable
4.
Enter an extension number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
To disable Intercept Routing, press CLEAR.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line group, press NEXT or PREV,
or SELECT and the desired CO line group number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• You set the extension numbers in program [003] “Extension Number
Set” or floating numbers of external ringer, UCD and pagers, in
program [813] “Floating Number Assignment.”
• To assign all CO line groups to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO line
group 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Intercept Routing
4-88
System Programming
4.6
411
CO Line Programming
Host PBX Access Codes
Description
Assigns Host PBX access codes. If the system is installed behind a
host PBX, an access code is required to make an outside call. Up to
four codes can be stored for a CO line group assigned the line.
Selection
• CO line group (TRG) number: 1 through 8,
( =all CO line groups)
• Access code: 1 or 2 digits, four different entries (max.)
Default
All CO line groups – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 411.
Display : TRG Host PBX NO.
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : TRK GRP NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line group number.
To enter CO line group number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: TRG1:
4.
,
,
,
Enter an access code.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new access code.
Display example: TRG1:01,
5.
,
,
To enter more access codes for the same CO line group, press
→ and enter the access codes until all the required entries are
completed.
Display example: TRG1:01,08,10,22
6.
Press STORE.
7.
To program another CO line group, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line group number.
8.
Repeat steps 4 through 7.
9.
Press END.
System Programming
4-89
4.6
CO Line Programming
411
Host PBX Access Codes (contd.)
Conditions
• This program is only required if a host PBX is connected to the system.
• The access code has one or two digits, consisting of 0 through 9 and
.
• If conflicting access codes (such as 8 and 81) are stored for the same
CO line group, the 1-digit code (8) only will be in effect.
• To assign all CO line groups to one selection, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO line
group 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
External Feature Access
Host PBX Access
Pause Insertion, Automatic
4-90
System Programming
4.6
418
CO Line Programming
External Ringer Assignment
Description
Selects whether external ringer will ring or not when a call arrives
through a CO line.
Selection
• CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Disable (no ring) / Enable 1 (Ringer 1) / Enable 2
(Ringer 2)
Default
All CO lines – Disable
Programming
1.
Enter 418.
Display: Ringer Assign
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one, press the key at step 3. In this case,
the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
External Ringer
System Programming
4-91
4.6
CO Line Programming
419
Subscriber Number Assignment
Description
Assign the subscriber number which is assigned to a CO line to a
central office for Calling Line Identification Presentation or
Connected Line Identification Presentation.
Selection
• CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Telephone number: 16 digits (max.)
Default
All CO lines – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 419.
Display: Telephone Number
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Not Stored
4.
Enter a telephone number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line number, press NEXT or PREV,
or SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• The valid characters are 0 through 9.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 3. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, CO 01 through CO 12 are for the Master
System and CO 13 through CO 24 are for the Slave, If available.
• To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display,
press → or ←.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
4-92
System Programming
4.6
420
CO Line Programming
Direct Dialing In
Description
Assign the contract status of the Direct Dialing In (DDI) Service on
CO line basis. This setting is also sued for Calling Line
Identification Presentation (CLIP) and Connected line
Identification Presentation (COLP).
Selection
• CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Disable/Enable
Default
All CO lines – Enable
Programming
1.
Enter 420.
Display: ISDN Service Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all CO lines to one, press the key at step 3. In this case,
the display shows the contents programmed for CO01.
• If “Enable” is selected, the subscriber number and extension number is
provided to ISDN for CLIP and COLP.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Direct Dialing In (DDI)
System Programming
4-93
4.6
CO Line Programming
421
CO Line Name Assignment
Description
Assigns names of company or customer to each CO line so that the
operator or the extension user can find the destination to which the
caller tries to reach, before answering.
Selection
• CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
• Name: 10 characters (max.)
Default
All CO lines – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 421.
Display: CO Line Name
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: CO Line NO?–>
3.
Enter a CO line number.
To enter CO line number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: CO01: Not Stored
4.
Enter a name.
For entering characters, see Section 4.1.3 “Entering Characters.”
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new name.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another CO line, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired CO line number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
In case of the KX-TD1232, CO01 through CO12 are for the Master
System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave, if available.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
CO Line Name Display
Display, Call Information
4-94
System Programming
4.6
422
CO Line Programming
ISDN Port Type
Description
Assigns the type of each port either CO line or extension line on
ISDN port basis.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• CO (CO line) / Extension
Default
All ports – CO
Programming
1.
Enter 422.
Display: ISDN Line Type
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:CO
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
System Programming
4-95
4.6
CO Line Programming
423
ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
Description
Assigns the active mode of Layer 1 on ISDN port basis.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Permanent / Call
Default
All ports – Permanent
Programming
1.
Enter 423.
Display: L1 Active Mode
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Permanent
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
4-96
System Programming
4.6
424
CO Line Programming
ISDN Configuration
Description
Assigns the configuration on ISDN port basis.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Point (point to point) / Multipoint (point to multipoint)
Default
All ports – Point
Programming
1.
Enter 424.
Display: Access Mode
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Point
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• If one equipment is connected to the ISDN port, select "Point," If
multiple equipments are connected, select "Multipoint."
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
System Programming
4-97
4.6
CO Line Programming
425
ISDN Data Link Mode
Description
Assigns the data link mode on ISDN port basis.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Permanent / Call
Default
All ports – Permanent
Programming
1.
Enter 425.
Display: Data Link Mode
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Permanent
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port number, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
4-98
System Programming
4.6
426
CO Line Programming
ISDN TEI Mode
Description
Assigns the Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) mode on ISDN port
basis.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Fix 0 through 63 / Automatic
Default
All ports – Fix 0
Programming
1.
Enter 426.
Display: TEI Assign
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a Port 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #01:Fix 0
4.
Enter TEI.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• If the "Point" is selected in program [424] , assign the fixed TEI. If
"Multipoint" is selected, assign "Automatic."
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
System Programming
4-99
4.6
CO Line Programming
427
ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number
Description
Selects whether the Multiple Subscriber Number is allocated to
each terminal equipment on ISDN S0 bus or not on ISDN port
basis.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Enable / Disable (no number)
Default
All ports – Disable
Programming
1.
Enter 427.
Display: MSN Service
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• After this assignment, you should reset the system so that this
assignment is effective.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
4-100
System Programming
4.6
428
CO Line Programming
ISDN Extension Progress Tone
Description
Enables or disables to send the progress tone to ISDN extension on
ISDN port basis.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Enable / Disable (no tone)
Default
All ports – Disable
Programming
1.
Enter 428.
Display: ISDN EXT Tone
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
ISDN Extension
System Programming
4-101
4.7
COS Programming
500-501
Toll Restriction Level — Day / Night
Description
Each extension must be assigned a Class of Service (COS). These
programs set the toll restriction value for each COS in day or night
mode.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
• Level number: 1 through 8
Default
All COS – Level 1 — Day / Night
Programming
1.
( =all COS)
Enter a program address (500 for day or 501 for night).
Display example: TRS Level Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1:1
4.
Enter a level number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Night Service
Toll Restriction
4-102
System Programming
4.7
503
COS Programming
Call Transfer to CO Line
Description
This program determines which Classes of Services (COS) are
allowed to perform the Call Transfer to CO Line function.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
• Enable/Disable
Default
All COS – Enable
Programming
1.
( =all COS)
Enter 503.
Display: Transfer to CO
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Transfer, Screened – to CO Line
System Programming
4-103
4.7
COS Programming
504
Call Forwarding to CO Line
Description
This program determines which Classes of Services (COS) are
allowed to perform the Call Forwarding to CO Line function.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
• Disable/Enable
Default
All COS – Disable.
Programming
1.
( =all COS)
Enter 504.
Display: Call FWD to CO
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: Bkl1: COS1: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – to CO Line
4-104
System Programming
4.7
505
COS Programming
Executive Busy Override
Description
Determines which Classes of Services (COS) are allowed to
perform Executive Busy Override – CO Line / Extension.
Executive Busy Override allows the user to intrude into an
established call.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
• Enable/Disable
Default
All COS – Disable
Programming
1.
( =all COS)
Enter 505.
Display: Busy Override
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Executive Busy Override – CO Line
Executive Busy Override – Extension
System Programming
4-105
4.7
COS Programming
506
Executive Busy Override Deny
Description
This program is used to determine which Classes of Services (COS)
are allowed to deny Executive Busy Override. Executive Busy
Override Deny allows the user to prevent Executive Busy Override
– CO Line / Extension from being executed by another extension
user.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
• Disable/Enable
Default
All COS – Enable
Programming
1.
( =all COS)
Enter 506.
Display: Busy Over. Deny
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Executive Busy Override – CO Line
Executive Busy Override – Extension
4-106
System Programming
4.7
507
COS Programming
Do Not Disturb Override
Description
This program determines which Classes of Services (COS) are
allowed to perform Do Not Disturb (DND) Override.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
• Disable/Enable
Default
All COS – Disable
Programming
1.
( =all COS)
Enter 507.
Display: DND Override
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
System Programming
4-107
4.7
COS Programming
508
Account Code Entry Mode
Description
There are three account code modes: Option, Verified-All Calls and
Verified-Toll Restriction Override. This program determines the
mode to be used by each Class of Service (COS).
Optional mode: The user can enter any account code, if needed.
Verified – All Calls mode:
The user must always enter a pre-assigned account code to make an
outside call.
Verified – Toll Restriction Override mode:
The user must enter a pre-assigned account code when the user
needs to override toll restriction.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8, ( =all COS)
• Option / Verify-All (Verified-All Calls) / Verify-Toll (VerifiedToll Restriction Override)
Default
All COS – Option
Programming
1.
Enter 508.
Display: Call Accounting
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Option
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• Program [105] “Account Codes” is used to define the Account Codes
for the Verified modes.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Account Code Entry
Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry
4-108
System Programming
4.7
509-510
COS Programming
Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialing – Day/Night
Description
These programs set the toll restriction value used in System Speed
Dialing for each Class of Service (COS) in day or night mode.
When the user makes a call with System Speed Dialing, the system
will check the phone number with this level.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
• Level number: 1 through 8
Default
All COS – Level 1 – Day / Night
Programming
1.
( =all COS)
Enter a program address (509 for day or 510 for night).
Display: SPD TRS LVL Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1:1
4.
Enter a level number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing
System Programming
4-109
4.7
COS Programming
511
Door Opener Access
Description
Enables or disables to unlock the door opener by feature number on
a Class of Service (COS) basis.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
( =all COS)
• Enable/Disable
Default
All COS – Enable
Programming
1.
Enter 511.
Display: Door Opener
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Door Opener
4-110
System Programming
4.7
512
COS Programming
External Relay Access
Description
Enables or disables to turn on the external relay on a Class of
Service (COS) basis.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
( =all COS)
• Enable/Disable
Default
All COS – Enable
Programming
1.
Enter 512.
Display: External Relay
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
External Relay
System Programming
4-111
4.7
COS Programming
513
Night Service Access
Description
Enables or disables to switch the Day/Night service on a Class of
Service (COS) basis.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
( =all COS)
• Enable/Disable
Default
All COS – Enable
Programming
1.
Enter 513.
Display: Night Service
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• The operator extension can switch the mode regardless of setting.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Night Service
4-112
System Programming
4.7
514
COS Programming
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
Description
Enables or disables to reject Direct Dialing In call on a Class of
Service (COS) basis.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
( =all COS)
• Enable/Disable
Default
All COS – Disable
Programming
1.
Enter 514.
Display: DND for DDI
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
• The operator extension cannot reject the call regardless of setting.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In Call
System Programming
4-113
4.7
COS Programming
516
Calling Line Identification Restriction
Description
Enables or disables the Calling Line Identification Restriction
(CLIR) Service on a Class of Service (COS) basis.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
( =all COS)
• Enable/Disable
Default
All COS – Disable
Programming
1.
Enter 516.
Display: CLIR
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO?–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1-Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
4-114
System Programming
4.7
517
COS Programming
Connected Line Identification Restriction
Description
Enables or disables the Connected Line Identification Restriction
(COLR) Service.
Selection
• COS number: 1 through 8,
( =all COS)
• Enable/Disable
Default
All COS – Disable
Programming
1.
Enter 517.
Display: COLR
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : COS NO.–>
3.
Enter a COS number.
To enter COS number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: COS1: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another COS, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired COS number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
To assign all COS to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
System Programming
4-115
4.8
Extension Programming
600
EXtra Device Port
Description
EXtra Device Port (XDP) allows a single line telephone (SLT) to be
connected to the same jack as a proprietary telephone (PT) or DSS
Console. This program assigns which jacks are XDP. The SLT and
the PT / DSS Console of the programmed jack work as independent
extensions.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64,
( =all jacks)
• Enable/Disable
Default
All jacks – Disable
Programming
1.
Enter 600.
Display: XDP Assign
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #01: Disable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
• Immediately after changing your assignment, changed setting may not
work for a maximum of eight seconds.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
EXtra Device Port (XDP)
4-116
System Programming
601
4.8
Extension Programming
Class of Service
Description
Programs each extension for a Class of Service (COS). The COS
determines the call handling abilities of each extension.
A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per
extension.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• COS number: 1 through 8
Default
All jacks-1/2 – COS 1
Programming
1.
Enter 601.
Display: COS Assign
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?–>
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display example: #01-1:COS1, COS1
4.
Enter a COS number for primary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
5.
Press →.
6.
Enter a COS number for secondary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
Conditions
7.
Press STORE.
8.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10.
Press END.
• There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services. Every extension
must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS
Programming of programs [500] through [517] and [991].
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
Jack numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
System Programming
4-117
4.8
Extension Programming
601
Class of Service (contd.)
• To assign all jacks to one COS, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Class of Service (COS)
4-118
System Programming
602
4.8
Extension Programming
Extension Group Assignment
Description
Assigns each extension to an extension group. Extension groups
are used for Group Call Pickup, Station Hunting, Uniform Call
Distribution and Paging – Group. This program is also used to
assign all Voice Mail ports / Automated Attendant ports of your
Voice Processing System, if available, to an extension group.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Extension group number: 1 through 8
Default
All jacks-1/2 – Extension group 1
Programming
1.
Enter 602.
Display: EXT Group Asn
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display example: #01-1:EXG1
4.
Enter the extension group number.
To change the current entry, enter the new extension group number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• There is a maximum of eight extension groups. Each extension can
only belong to one group.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one extension group, press the key at step 3.
In this case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Pickup, Group
Extension Group
Paging – Group
Station Hunting
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Voice Mail Integration
System Programming
4-119
4.8
Extension Programming
603-604
DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night
Description
A DIL 1:N line can be assigned to ring more than one extension.
All incoming calls from the programmed CO lines are directed to
the specified extensions. These programs assign the extensions and
the notification method for each CO line in both day and night
modes.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• CO line number: KX-TD816: 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232: 01 through 24
( =all CO lines)
• Disab (disable) / Immdt (immediate ringing) / 1Rng (1 ring
delay) / 3Rng (3 rings delay) / 6Rng (6 rings delay) / NoRng (no
ring)
Default
All jacks-1/2 – all CO lines – Immdt (Immediate ringing)
— Day / Night
Programming
1.
Enter a program address (603 for day or 604 for night).
Display example: DIL 1:N Asn Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display example: #01-1: CO01: Immdt
4.
Enter the CO line number.
You can also keep pressing → or ← until the desired CO line number
is displayed.
4-120
5.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
System Programming
603-604
4.8
Extension Programming
DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing — Day / Night (contd.)
SELECT and the desired jack number.
8.
Repeat steps 4 through 7.
9.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available. Jack
numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection, press the key at
step 3 or step 4. In these cases, the display shows the contents
programmed for Jack 01 or for CO line 01.
• There are six notification methods:
(1) Immediate ringing: rings immediately
(2) 1 ring delay
(3) 3 rings delay
(4) 6 rings delay
(5) No ring: only the indicator flashes
(6) Disable: no incoming call
• When you change the jack number by pressing NEXT or PREV, the
CO line group number is not changed. Example #03-1:CO06.....Press
NEXT.....#03-2:CO06
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Direct In Lines (DIL)
Night Service
Ringing, Delayed
System Programming
4-121
4.8
Extension Programming
605-606
Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night
Description
Determines the CO lines which can be accessed by an extension in
both day and night modes. The extension users can make outgoing
outside calls using the assigned CO lines.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• CO line number: KX-TD816: 01 through 08,
KX-TD1232: 01 through 24
( =all CO lines)
• Enabl (enable) / Disab (disable)
Default
All jacks-1/2 – all CO lines – Enabl — Day / Night
Programming
1.
Enter a program address (605 for day or 606 for night).
Display example: CO Out Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display example: #01-1:CO01:Enabl
4.
Enter the desired CO line number, or keep pressing → or ←
until the desired CO line is displayed.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
4-122
5.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
8.
Repeat steps 4 through 7.
9.
Press END.
System Programming
605-606
4.8
Extension Programming
Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment — Day / Night (contd.)
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
Jack numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection, press the key at
step 3 or 4. In these cases, the display shows the contents programmed
for Jack 01 or CO01.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing
Night Service
System Programming
4-123
4.8
Extension Programming
607-608
Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
Description
These programs assign the extensions which will ring when a
doorphone call is received during the day and night modes.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Doorphone number: KX-TD816 – 1, Disable,
KX-TD1232 – 1 or 2, Disable,
two entries (max.)
Default
Jack 01-1– 12; Other jacks – Disable (no doorphone) — Day /
Night
Programming
1.
Enter a program address (607 for day or 608 for night).
Display example: Doorphone in Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display example: #01-1:12
4.
Enter the doorphone numbers.
To assign no doorphone, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new doorphone
numbers.
Conditions
4-124
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
• One doorphone can be installed in each system. In case of the KXTD1232, doorphone 1 is installed in the Master System, 2 in the Slave,
if available.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, you can enter up to two doorphone numbers
for each extension.
System Programming
4.8
Extension Programming
607-608
Doorphone Ringing Assignment — Day / Night
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Doorphone Call
Night Service
System Programming
4-125
4.8
Extension Programming
609
Voice Mail Access Codes
Description
Assigns a mailbox number for each extension, only if program
[990] “System Additional Information, Field (18)” is set to “free.”
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Mailbox number: 16 digits (max.)
Default
All jacks – Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 609.
Display: Mailbox ID Code
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display example: #01-1:Not Stored
4.
Enter a mailbox number.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new number.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available. Jack
numbers in the out-of-service system are unacceptable.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• The system supports a maximum of eight jacks (16 jacks during System
Connection*) for connection to a Voice Processing System as the Voice
Mail or Automated Attendant ports.
• Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits, consisting of 0
through 9, , # and PAUSE.
• To display parts of the code which have scrolled off the display, press
→ or ←.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Voice Mail Integration
4-126
System Programming
610
4.8
Extension Programming
Department Codes
Description
Assigns the department codes.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (-1 / -2)
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (-1 / -2)
( =all jacks, -1 = first part, -2 = second part)
• Department code: 5 digits (max.)
Default
All jacks - Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 610.
Display: Department Code
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (–2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display example: #01–1: Not Stored
4.
Enter a department code.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new department
code.
Conditions
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
• Each extension has one department code. Each code has a maximum of
5 digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
System Programming
4-127
4.8
Extension Programming
Department Codes
610
(contd.)
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
Feature References
4-128
Section 3, Features,
Department Codes
System Programming
4.8
611
Extension Programming
Extension Connection Assignment
Description
Assigns whether the extension can perform all accesses or not.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (–1 / –2),
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (–1 / –2),
( =all jacks, -1=first part, -2=second part)
• Connect/No Connect
Default
All jacks - Connect
Programming
1.
Enter 611.
Display: Ext Connection
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (-2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display example: #01-1 : Connect
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• The extension of the jack number 01 should be set to “Verbunden.”
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Extension Connection Assignment
System Programming
4-129
4.8
Extension Programming
612
Data Line Security
Description
Sets or cancels the Data Line Security mode on an extension basis.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16, (–1 / –2),
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64, (–1 / –2),
( =all jacks, -1=first part, -2=second part)
• On/Off
Default
All jacks - Off
Programming
1.
Enter 612.
Display: Data Mode
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : Jack NO?->
3.
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
To select the second part (–2), press NEXT after entering a jack
number.
Display example: #01–1: Off
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Data Line Security
4-130
System Programming
613
4.8
Extension Programming
ISDN Class of Service
Description
Programs each ISDN port for a Class of Service (COS). The COS
determines the call handling abilities of each port.
A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per port.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• COS number: 1 through 8
Default
All ports – COS 1
Programming
1.
Enter 613.
Display: ISDN COS Assign
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?–>
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:COS1,COS1
4.
Enter a COS number for primary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
5.
Press →.
6.
Enter a COS number for secondary number.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10.
Press END.
Conditions
• There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services. Every ISDN
extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to
the COS Programming of programs [500] through [517] and [991].
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Class of Service (COS)
ISDN Extension
System Programming
4-131
4.8
Extension Programming
614
Department Codes of ISDN Port
Description
Assigns the department code of the ISDN port.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• Department code: 5 digits (max.)
Default
All ports — Not stored
Programming
1.
Enter 614.
Display: ISDN Dept. Code
2.
Press NEXT.
Display : Port NO?->
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter a first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03: Not Stored
4.
Enter a department code.
To delete the current entry, press CLEAR.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new code.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another port, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• Each port has one department code. Each code has a maximum of 5
digits, consisting of 0 through 9.
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through
12 are for the Slave, if available.
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Department Codes
ISDN Extension
4-132
System Programming
615-616
4.8
Extension Programming
Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment – Day/Night for ISDN Extension
Description
Determines the CO lines which can be accessed by an ISDN
extension in both day and night modes. The extension users can
make outgoing outside calls using the assigned CO lines.
Selection
• Port number: KX-TD816—01 through 04,
KX-TD1232—03 through 06, 09 through 12,
( =all ports)
• CO line number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 8,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 24,
( =all CO lines)
• Enabl (enable) / Disab (disable)
Default
All ports – all CO lines – Enabl — Day / Night
Programming
1.
Enter a program address (615 for day or 616 for night).
Display example: CO Out(ISDN) Day
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Port NO?->
3.
Enter a port number.
To enter first port number, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #03:CO01:Enabl
4.
Enter the desired CO line number, or keep pressing → or ←
until the desired CO line is displayed.
To change the current entry, enter the new number.
Conditions
5.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
6.
Press STORE.
7.
To program another jack, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired port number.
8.
Repeat steps 4 through 7.
9.
Press END.
• Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09
through 12 are for the Slave, if available.
System Programming
4-133
4.8
Extension Programming
615-616
Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment – Day/Night for ISDN Extension
(contd.)
• To assign all ports to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for a first port.
• To assign all CO lines to one selection, press the key at step 4. In
this case, the display shows the contents programmed for CO 01.
• When you change a port number by pressing NEXT or PREV, the CO
line number is not changed.
Example #03:CO02.......Pressing NEXT....#04:CO02
Feature References
4-134
Section 3, Features,
CO Line Connection Assignment – Outgoing
ISDN Extension
Night Service
System Programming
4.8
Extension Programming
617
Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment†
Description
Assigns whether to close the mailbox or to keep recording the
conversation after the call intercepted.
Selection
• Jack number: KX-TD816 – 01 through 16,
KX-TD1232 – 01 through 64,
( =all jacks)
• Stop Rec / Keep Rec
Default
All jacks = Stop Rec (Stop recording)
Programming
1.
Enter 617.
Display:
2.
Press NEXT.
Display:
3.
LCS REC Mode
Jack NO?→
Enter a jack number.
To enter jack number 01, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: #01:Stop Rec
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another jack number, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and desired jack number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the
Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave, if available.
• For an explanation of jack numbering, see “Rotation of jack number”
on page 4-7.
• To assign all jacks to one selection, press the key at step 3. In this
case, the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Voice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to
a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System
(one that supports proprietary telephone integration; e.g. KX-TVP100)
System Programming
4-135
4.9
Resource Programming
800
SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call Log Printout
Description
Used to determine which calls will produce an SMDR printout.
Selection
• Outgoing calls: All (all calls) / Toll (toll calls only) /
Off (no printing)
• Incoming calls: On (all calls) / Off (no printing)
Default
Outgoing calls – Off; Incoming calls – Off
Programming
1.
Enter 800.
Display: Duration Log
2.
Press NEXT to program outgoing calls.
Display: Outgoing: Off
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press NEXT to program incoming calls.
Display: Incoming: Off
6.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• It is necessary to connect a printer to the Serial Interface (RS-232C)
port provided on the system.
• After connecting a printer, printout will be started in 10 seconds.
• If “Toll” is selected, the system will print out all the calls starting from
the numbers stored in programs [301]–[305] “TRS Denied Code Entry
for Levels 2 through 6.”
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
4-136
System Programming
4.9
801
Resource Programming
SMDR Format
Description
Used to match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the
printer. Page length determines the number of lines per page. Skip
perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end
of every page.
Selection
• Page length (lines): 4 through 99
• Skip perforation (lines): 0 through 95
Default
Page length – 66; Skip perforation – 0
Programming
1.
Enter 801.
Display: SMDR Format
2.
Press NEXT to program page length.
Display example: Page Length:66
3.
Enter the page length.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new page length.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press NEXT to program skip perforation.
Display example: Skip Perf: 0
6.
Enter the skip perforation.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new skip
perforation.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip
perforation length.
• A title is positioned on the first three lines on every page.
• The programmed format becomes valid only if the Serial Interface (RS232C) cable is connected. If a printer is already connected, disconnect
it and connect again. Otherwise the former format becomes valid.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Programming
4-137
4.9
Resource Programming
802
System Data Printout
Description
Starts or stops printing of the system data. All the current systemprogrammed data is printed out.
Selection
Start / Stop
Default
Not applicable.
Programming
1.
Enter 802.
Display: System Data Dump
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Print-Out: Start
3.
Press STORE to start printing.
Printing starts.
To stop printing in the middle of printing, press SELECT and go to
step 4.
When printing is completed, the display shows:
Display: Print-Out: Finish
4.
Press STORE.
Display: Print-Out:Stop
5.
Press END.
Conditions
You may stop printing by pressing the ENDE button, while records are
being printed out.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
4-138
System Programming
4.9
803
Resource Programming
Music Source Use
Description
Assigns the music source to be used for Music on Hold and
Background Music (BGM).
Selection
• Hold / BGM
• Music source number: KX-TD816 – 1 / 2 / No Use
KX-TD1232 – 1 through 4 / No Use
Default
Hold and BGM – Music 1
Programming
1.
Enter 803.
Display: Music Source Use
2.
Press NEXT to program Music on Hold.
Display example: Hold: Music1
3.
Enter a music source number.
To change the current entry, enter the new music source number.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press NEXT to program HGM.
Display example: BGM: Music1
6.
Enter a music source number.
To change the current entry, enter the new music source number.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, Music sources 1 and 2 are connected to the
Master System, 3 and 4 are to the Slave, if available. Any music source
can be used by either system.
• The system is provided with an internal music source. By default
setting, internal music source is used as Music Source 1 for these
systems. Program [990] “System Additional Information,” Field (20) is
used to select external music source for Music 1.
• To disable music, press CLEAR at steps 3 and 6.
• Program [804] “External Pager BGM” is used to enable / disable BGM
for each external pager.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Background Music (BGM)
Background Music (BGM) – External
Music on Hold
System Programming
4-139
4.9
Resource Programming
804
External Pager BGM
Description
Used to determine which external pagers will receive Background
Music (BGM). BGM – External is turned on and off by an
operator.
Selection
• External pager number: KX-TD816 – 1 / 2
KX-TD1232 – 1 through 4
• Disable (sends no BGM) / Enable (sends BGM)
Default
All external pagers – Disable
Programming
1.
Enter 804.
Display: Ext-Pag BGM
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Pager NO?->
3.
Enter an external pager number.
To enter pager number 1, you can also press NEXT.
Display example: Pager 1: Enable
4.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
5.
Press STORE.
6.
To program another pager, press NEXT or PREV, or
SELECT and the desired external pager number.
7.
Repeat steps 4 through 6.
8.
Press END.
Conditions
• In case of the KX-TD1232, external pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the
Master System, 3 and 4 in the Slave, if available.
• Program [803] “Music Source Use” is used to select the music source to
be used for BGM.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Background Music (BGM) – External
4-140
System Programming
4.9
805
Resource Programming
External Pager Confirmation Tone
Description
Used to remove the confirmation tone for external pagers. The
default setting sends confirmation tone 2 to the external pagers
before paging is broadcast. This programming applies to all the
external pagers.
Selection
On/Off
Default
On
Programming
1.
Enter 805.
Display: Ext-Pag Act-Tone
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: Tone: On
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
In case of the KX-TD1232, external pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the
Master System, 3 and 4 in the Slave, if available.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Confirmation Tone
Paging – All
Paging – External
System Programming
4-141
4.9
Resource Programming
806-807
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2
Description
New line code:
Baudrate:
Wortlänge:
Parität:
Stop bits:
Assigns the communication parameters for the Serial Interface (RS232C) for Port 1 (for KX-TD816 and Master System of KXTD1232 ) or Port 2 (Slave System of KX-TD1232).
Select the code for your printer or personal computer. If your
printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with carriage
return, select “CR.” If not, select “CR+LF.”
A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the
system to the printer or personal computer.
A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character.
A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error
in the string of bits composing a character. Make an appropriate
selection depending on the requirements of your printer or personal
computer.
A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a
character. Select an appropriate value depending on the
requirements of your printer or personal computer.
Selection
• New line code: CR+LF / CR
(CR=Carriage Return, LF=Line Feed)
• Baud Rate (baud): 150 / 300 / 600 / 1200 / 2400 / 4800 / 9600
• Word length (bits): 7 / 8
• Parity bit: None / Mark / Space / Even / Odd
• Stop bit length (bits): 1 / 2
Default
New line code = CR+LF; Baud Rate = 9600; Word length= 8;
Parity bit= NONE; Stop Bit = 1 — Port 1 / Port 2
Programming
1.
Enter a program address (806 for Port 1 or 807 for Port 2).
Display example: RS232C Paramet.1
2.
Press NEXT to program new line code.
Display example: NL-Code: CR+LF
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press NEXT to program baud rate.
Display example: Baud Rate: 9600
6.
4-142
System Programming
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
806-807
4.9
Resource Programming
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters — Port 1 / Port 2 (contd.)
7.
Press STORE.
8.
Press NEXT to program word length.
Display example: Word Length: 8bits
9.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
10.
Press STORE.
11.
Press NEXT to program parity bit.
Display example: Parity: None
12.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
13.
Press STORE.
14.
Press NEXT to program stop bit.
Display example: Stop Bit: 1bit
Conditions
15.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
16.
Press STORE.
17.
Press END.
• The following combinations are invalid.
Parity
Word Length
Stop Bit
Mark
8
2
Space
8
1
Space
8
2
• The program address of the out-of-service system port is unacceptable.
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Programming
4-143
4.9
Resource Programming
813
Floating Number Assignment
Description
Assigns the floating numbers for Digital Test Access (DTA)
External Pager, External Ringer, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Pilot Number, and the modem*. These numbers can be used the
same way extension numbers are used for station access.
Selection
• Floating station: Pager1 / Pager2 / Pager3* / Pager4* / UCD
Grp1 / UCD Grp2 / UCD Grp3 / UCD Grp4 / UCD Grp5 /
UCD Grp6 / UCD Grp7 / UCD Grp8 / MODEM* / DTA /
Ringer1 / Ringer2*
• Floating number: 2 through 4 digits
Default
Pager1=296; Pager2=297; Pager3*=396; Pager4*=397;
UCD Grp1 through 8= 281 through 288; MODEM*=299;
DTA=399; Riger1=298; Ringer2*=398
Programming
1.
Enter 813.
Display: FLT EXT NO.
2.
Press NEXT to program Pager 1.
Display example: Pager1: 296
To program another floating station, keep pressing NEXT or PREV
until the desired floating station is displayed.
3.
Enter a floating number.
To change the current entry, press CLEAR and the new floating
number.
Conditions
4-144
4.
Press STORE.
5.
To program another floating station, keep pressing NEXT or
PREV until the desired floating station is displayed.
6.
Repeat steps 3 through 5.
7.
Press END.
• A floating number is composed of two through four numerical digits, 0
through 9.
• The leading one or two digits of the floating numbers are subject to
program [100] “Flexible Numbering, (01) through (16) 1st through 16th
hundred extension blocks.”
• Floating numbers and extension numbers should be unique. Double
entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid. Valid entry
example: 10 and 11, 10 and 110; Invalid entry example: 10 and 106,
210 and 21.
• You cannot leave the entry empty.
System Programming
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
4.9
813
Resource Programming
Floating Number Assignment (contd.)
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Floating Station
System Programming
4-145
4.9
Resource Programming
814
Modem Standard*
Description
Assigns the modem standard used by your modem.
Selection
BELL / CCITT
Default
CCITT
Programming
1.
Enter 814.
Display: MODEM Standard
2.
Press NEXT.
Display example: MODEM:CCITT
3.
Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is
displayed.
4.
Press STORE.
5.
Press END.
Conditions
None
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer
4-146
System Programming
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only.
4.10
Option Programming
990
System Additional Information
Description
Area 1
Adds the following programming items, if required.
There are fourteen fields available in Area 1 as follows:
Display
example
Field number
Area 2
0010100010110001
↓ ↓
↓
(10) (9) (8)
There are twelve fields available in Area 2 as follows:
Display
example
1110010000101100
↓
Field number
Area 3
↓
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(7) (6) (5) (4)(44)(34)(33)(32)(3) (2) (1)
↓
↓
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(unused) (22) (21) (20)(19)(18) (17)(16) (15)(14)(13)(12)(11)
[1] through [16] below match CO lines 1 through 16:
Display
example
0000000000000000
CO number
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
[16] [15][14][13][12][11][10] [9] [8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
↓
(23)*
Field number
Area 4
[17] through [24] below match CO lines 17 through 24:
Display
example
1111111100000000
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
CO number
[24][23][22] [21][20][19][18][17]
↓ ↓ ↓
Field number
4-147
System Programming
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(31)(30)(29)(28) (27)(26)(25)(24)
↓
(23)*
*: CO numbers [9] through [24] in the field number
(23) are available for KX-TD1232 only.
4.10
990
Option Programming
System Additional Information
Area 5
(contd.)
There are ten fields available in Area 5 as follows:
Display
example
Field number
1111100111111111
↓
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(unused)
(45) (43)(42)(41)(40) (39)(38)(37)(36)(35)
Explanation for Areas 1 and 2
Field
Description
Selection
Default
References
(1)
Sound source during transfer.
0 : ringback tone
1 : Music on Hold
1
(2)
Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly and
then placing down the handset (during an
outside line call (single line telephones only).
Reserved
Enables or disables the dial tone between
obtaining a CO line and dialing the phone
number when using the one-touch dial, redial
or speed dial function.
Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly
(single line telephones only).
0 : Consultation
Hold
1 : disconnection
0
• CALL
TRANSFER
FEATURES
• Music on Hold
Call Hold
0 : disable
1 : enable
1
None
0
Call Hold
0
Voice Mail
Integration
Voice Mail
Integration
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
4-148
0 : Consultation
Hold
1 : disconnection
Sets the duration of the DTMF signals sent to 0 : 80 ms
the Voice Processing System (VPS) ports.
1 : 160 ms
Sets the time the system waits before sending 00 : 0.5 s
DTMF signals (such as a mailbox number) to 01 : 1.0 s
VPS after VPS answers a call.
10 : 1.5 s
11 : 2.0 s
Sets the time the system waits before
00 : 0.5 s
sending DTMF signals (programmed in
01 : 1.0 s
[113]) to VPS after the VPS calls an
10 : 1.5 s
extension.
11 : 2.0 s
Assigns whether the system turns off the
0 : system
Message Waiting lamp or the VPS does
1 : VPS
when the user hears a message recorded in a
mailbox.
System Programming
10
10
Voice Mail
Integration
0
• Message
Waiting
• Voice Mail
Integration
4.10
Option Programming
990
System Additional Information
Field
Description
(10)
(11)
Reserved
If an outside party is transferred and
unanswered, assigns whether Transfer
Recall occurs at the transfer originating
extension or at Operator.
Reserved
Allows you to remove confirmation tone 4.
By default, a beep tone sounds when a threeparty conference is started / ended.
Reversed
Reserved
Allows you to remove Confirmation Tone 3.
This tone is sent when a conversation is
established just after dialing the feature
numbers for accessing the following
features: Call Pickup, Paging, Paging
Answer, TAFAS Answer, Hold Retrieve and
Call Park Retrieve.
Reserved
Assigns if an extension’s mailbox number is
substituted by the extension number or it is
programmable (free). If a call is forwarded
or rerouted to the VPS, this system
automatically transmits the mailbox number
to the VPS to specify the user’s mailbox. To
make it programmable, select “1 (free),”
then assign the number in program [609]
“Voice Mail Access Codes.”
Assigns the first display of a large display
proprietary telephone (KX-T7235) in
Station Speed Dialing.
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
Selection
(contd.)
Default
References
0 : extension
1 : Operator
0
Call Transfer,
Unscreened – to
Extension
0 : disable
1 : enable
1
Confirmation
Tone
0 : disable
1 : enable
1
Confirmation
Tone
0 : extension
number
1 : free
0
Voice Mail
Integration
0 : names
1 : numbers
0
Special Features
for KX-T7235 —
Station Speed
Dialing
System Programming
4-149
4.10
990
Option Programming
System Additional Information
Field
Description
(20)
Assigns the source of Music Source 1 for
Music on Hold and BGM.
(21)
(22)
Reserved
Selects intercom dial tone frequency.
(32)
(33)
Reserved
Selects the destination during the day mode,
when the operator number is sent as a Direct
Dialing In number.
Selects the destination during the night
mode, when the operator number is sent as a
Direct Dialing In number.
Assigns the operation when the Master and
Slave system of KX-TD1232 are
disconnected.
(34)
(44)
(contd.)
Selection
Default
References
0 : internal music
source
1 : external music
source
0
• Background
Music (BGM)
• Background
Music (BGM)
– External
• Music on Hold
0 : normal
1 : distinctive
0
None
0 : DIL 1:N
1 : Operator
1
Direct Dialing In
(DDI)
0 : DIL 1:N
1 : Operator
1
Direct Dialing In
(DDI)
0 : Reset
automatically
1 : Not reset
0
None
Explanation for Areas 3 and 4
Field
Description
(23)
This field is provided to assign PAD Switch
Control (volume control of received calls on a
CO line). This can be assigned per CO line.
The CO numbers [1] through [8] correspond to
CO lines 1 through 8 for KX-TD816 and CO
numbers [1] through [24] correspond to CO
lines 1 through 24 respectively.
Prohibits or allows a call originated by an AA
port of VPS to another AA port.
Reserved
0 : 0 dB
1 : -3 dB
0
None
0 : prohibit
1 : allow
1
Voice Mail
Integration
None
(26)
Enables or disables the SMDR printout of the
secret dial numbers.
0 : disable
1 : enable
1
(27)
Enables or disables the Digital Test Access.
0 : enable
1 : disable
1
(24)
(25)
(28-31) Reserved
4-150
System Programming
Selection
Default
1
References
Station Message
Detail Recording
(SMDR)
None
4.10
Option Programming
990
System Additional Information
(contd.)
Explanation for Area 5
Field
Description
(35) Assigns the displayed language when in
System Programming or when printing out
the data to SMDR.
(36) Assigns whether the system sends the Follow
On ID code to the VPS or not, when a call is
directed to the VPS by Call Forwarding.
(37) Assigns whether the system sends the Follow
On ID code to the VPS or not, when a call is
directed to the VPS by Intercept Routing.
(38) Assigns how an SLT user replies to a
message left by the Message Waiting feature.
(39) Assigns how to treat the extension user who
reaches the pre-assigned limit of the Budget
Management feature.
(40) Assigns whether the data (the date and room
number) is printed out or not when a guest
checks-in and checks-out.
(41) Assigns whether to send an absent message,
No.6- 9, to an extension or to output it to the
printer when the feature number is dialed.
Outputting the message to the printer is
useful when informing a receptionist of the
cleaning status of a room or the total of the
minibar at the hotel.
(42) Assigns whether or not the new page will
start whenever printing out the data in the
Hotel Application feature.
(43) Assigns whether or not to print out the data
when the system receives a call and a call is
answered.
(45) Assigns whether or not to add an extension
number to a subscriber's number for Calling
Line Identification Presentation and
Connected Line Identification Presentation.
Selection
Default
References
0 : English
1 : German
1
Multilingual
0 : disable
1 : enable
1
Voice Mail
Integration
1 : disable
0 : enable
1
Voice Mail
Integration
1 : off-hook
0 : off-hook and
feature number
1 : sends an alarm
sound
0 : sends an alarm
sound and then
disconnects the
line in fifteen
seconds.
1 : disable
0 : enable
1
Message Waiting
1
Budget
Management
1
HOTEL
APPLICATION
0 : SMDR (printer)
1 : extension
1
• Absent
Message
Capability
• HOTEL
APPLICATION
1 : disable
0 : enable
1
None
1 : disable
0 : enable
1
None
1 : adds
0 : does not add
0
• Calling Line
Identification
Restriction
(CLIR)
• Connected Line
Identification
Restriction
(COLR)
System Programming
4-151
4.10
990
Option Programming
System Additional Information
(contd.)
Selection
• Area code: 01 (area 1) / 02 (area 2) / 03 (area 3) / 04 (area 4) /
05 (area 5)
Field number : 1 through 22, 32 through 34, 44
(for areas 1 and 2)
23 through 31 (for areas 3 and 4)
35 through 43, 45 (for area 5)
• Selection: See “Selection” shown in the lists for each area.
Default
See “Default” shown in the lists.
Programming
1.
Enter 990.
Display: System Add Inf.
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: Area NO?->
3.
Enter an area code.
Display example: 0010100011111001
4.
Keep pressing ← or → to move the cursor to the desired
field.
5.
Enter your selection.
To change the current entry, press STORE and the new selection.
6.
To program another field, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
To program another area, press SELECT and the desired
area code.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10.
Press END.
Conditions
None
Feature References
See “References” shown in the lists.
4-152
System Programming
4.10
Option Programming
991
COS Additional Information
Description
(1) Enables or disables the Call Forwarding – Follow Me feature
on a COS basis.
The field (1) below is used to enter your selection.
Display
example
1111111111111111
↓
Field number
(unused)
Selection
• COS number : 1 through 8, ( =all COS)
• Selection for field (1): 0: disable / 1: enable
Default
Field 1: All COS – 1
Programming
1.
↓
(1)
↓
(unused)
Enter 991.
Display: COS Add Inf.
2.
Press NEXT.
Display: COS NO?->
3.
Enter a COS number.
Display example: 1111111111111111
4.
Keep pressing ← or → to move the cursor to the desired
field.
5.
Enter your selection
To change the current entry, press STORE and the new selection.
6.
To program another field, repeat steps 4 and 5.
7.
Press STORE.
8.
To program another COS, press SELECT and the desired
COS number.
9.
Repeat steps 4 through 8.
10.
Press END.
System Programming
4-153
4.10
991
Option Programming
COS Additional Information
(contd.)
Conditions
To assign all COS numbers to one selection, press the
Feature References
Section 3, Features,
Call Forwarding – Follow Me
Class of Service (COS)
4-154
System Programming
key at step 3.
Section 5
List
This section lists tone and ring tone
and default values of
System Programming.
5.1
Tone / Ring Tone
<TONE>
1 sec
Confirmation Tone 1
Confirmation Tone 2
Confirmation Tone 3
Confirmation Tone 4
Dial Tone 1
Dial Tone 2
Dial Tone 3
Dial Tone 4
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
Ringback Tone 1
Ringback Tone 2
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Tone
Warning Tone
5 sec
Message Waiting Tone
(SLT)
5-2
List
5.1
Tone / Ring Tone
<TONE>
15 sec
Hold Alarm
Call Waiting Tone 1
(outside/intercom)
5 sec
Call Waiting Tone 2
(outside)
Call Waiting Tone 2
(intercom)
<RING TONE>
1 sec
Outside Calls /
Outside Hold Recall
Intercom Calls /
Intercom Hold Recall
Callback Ringing
(Camp-On Recall)
Doorphone Calls /
Timed Reminder
5 sec
External Sensor
List
5-3
5.2
Address
Default Values
[000]
[001]
[002]
[003]
Program
Manager Programming
Date and Time Set
System Speed Dialing Number Set
System Speed Dialing Name Set
Extension Number Set
[004]
[005]
Extension Name Set
Flexible CO Button Assignment
Default
1 Jan ’94 SAT 00:00
Not Stored
Not Stored
• KX-TD816
Jack 01-1 through 16-1=201 through 216
Jack 01-2 through 16-2=301 through 316
• KX-TD1232
Jack 01-1 through 64-1=201 through 264
Jack 01-2 through 64-2=301 through 364
Not Stored
• KX-TD816
For KX-T7230
All Jacks – CO button 1 through 8 = Single
CO 01 through 08, CO buttons 9 through 24
= Not Stored; Ring tone type 2
For KX-T7235
All Jacks – CO button 1 through 8 = Single
CO 01 through 08, CO buttons 9 through 12
= Not Stored; Ring tone type 2
For KX-T7250
All Jacks – CO button 1 through 6 = Single
CO 01 through 06; Ring tone type 2
• KX-TD1232
For KX-T7230
All Jacks – CO buttons 1 through 24 =
Single-CO01 through 24; Ring tone type2
For KX-T7235
All Jacks – CO buttons 1 through 12 =
Single-CO01 through 12; Ring tone type2
[006]
Operator / Manager Extension
Assignment—Day/Night
[007]
DSS Console Port and Paired
Telephone Assignment
5-4
List
For KX-T7250
All Jacks – CO button 1 through 6 = Single
CO 01 through 06, ; Ring tone type 2
Operator 1=Port 01—Day/Night
Operator 2 Not Stored—Day/Night
Manager=Not Stored—Day/Night
Not Stored
5.2
Address
Default Values
Program
[008]
Absent Messages
[009]
Emergency Dial Number Set
[010]
[011]
[012]
[013]
[014]
Budget Management
Charge Margin and Tax Rate
ISDN Extension Number Set
ISDN Extension Name Set
Budget Management on ISDN Port
System Programming
Flexible Numbering
Language Assignment
Day / Night Service Starting Time
[100]
[101]
[102]
[103]
[105]
[106]
[107]
[108]
[109]
[110]
[111]
Automatic Access CO Line Group
Assignment
Account Codes
Station Hunting Type
System Password
One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button
Expansion Card/Unit Type
[113]
Network type Assignment
DDI Removed Digit / Added
Number Assignment
DDI Number for Operator
Assignment
VM Status DTMF Set
[114]
VM Command DTMF Set
[115]
[116]
[117]
[118]
[119]
[120]
Adjust Time
ROM Version Display
Charge Display Selection
Charge Verfication Assignment
Charge Verfication ID Code Set
Operator Queue
[112]
* : Available for KX-TD1232 only
Default
1: Will Return Soon 2: Gone Home
3: At EXT %%%; 4: Back at %%:%%
5: Out Until %%/%%; 6: In a Meeting
7 through 9: Not Stored
1: 0117, 2: 0118, 3: 0144
4 through 8: Not Stored
0 Franc
0, 0%
All Ports – Not Stored
All Ports – Not Stored
All Ports – 0 FR
See pages 4-38 and 4-39.
GERMAN
Every Day of the Week – Day=9:00 /
Night=17:00
12345678
Not Stored
All Extension Groups=Disable
1234
Enable
KX-TD816; S;E1
KX-TD1232; Master and Slave=S;E1;E2
NET2
Removed digit: 0, Added number: not stored
0
RBT=1; BT=2; ROT=3; DND=4; Answer=5;
Disconnect=#9; Confirm =9; FWD VM RBT=6;
FWD VM BT=7; FWD EXT RBT=8
LV MSG=H; GETMSG= H; AA-SVC=#8;
VM-SVC=#6
1:00
Not Applicable
Meter
Enable
1234
Queue: 8, H-UP: 4
List
5-5
5.2
Default Values
Address
Program
[121]
[122]
[123]
[125]
†[126]
†[127]
Pulse Dial Reception Assignment
Automatic Door Open Assignment
Hotel Application
Assignment of Denomination
Voice Mail Number Assignment
Voice Mail Extension Number
Assignment
†[128]
Voice Mail Extension Group
Assignment
Timer Programming
[200] Hold Recall Time
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[202] Call Forwarding – No Answer Time
[203] Intercept Time
[204] Pickup Dial Waiting Time
[207] First Digit Time
[208] Inter Digit Time
[209] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
[210] Automatic Redial Interval Time
[213] External Relay Connecting Time
[214] Message Waiting Ring Interval Time
TRS Programming
[301]–[305] TRS Denied Code Entry for
Levels 2 through 6
[306]–[310] TRS Excepted Code Entry for
Levels 2 through 6
CO Line Programming
[400] CO Line Connection Assignment
[401] CO Line Group Assignment
Default
Puls: Enable
Disable
Disable
FR
All jacks—Not Stored
VM-01=265, VM-02=266, VM-03=267,
VM-04=268, VM-05=269, VM-06=270,
VM-07=271, VM-08=272, VM-09=273,
VM-10=274, VM-11=275, VM-12=276,
ALL voice mail numbers=EXG 1
60 s
12 rings
3 rings
12 rings
1s
10 s
10 s
5 times
6 (60 seconds)
5s
10 min
Location 01 in program [301]:
Others: Not Stored
Not Stored
All CO Lines – Connect
CO01=TRG 1;CO02=TRG 2;
CO03=TRG 3;CO04=TRG 4;
CO05=TRG 5;CO06=TRG 6;
CO07=TRG 7;CO08=TRG 8 (for KX-TD816)
CO08 through CO24=TRG 8
(for KX-TD1232)
[407]–[408] DIL 1:1 Extension—Day/Night
[409]–[410] Intercept Extension—Day/Night All CO Lines=Disable—Day/Night
All CO Line Groups=Disable—Day/Night
[411] Host PBX Access Codes
Not Stored
[418] External Ringer Assignment
All CO Lines—Disable
[419] Subscriber Number Assignment
Not Stored
[420] Direct Dialing In
5-6
List
5.2
Address
[421]
[422]
[423]
[424]
[425]
[426]
[427]
Default Values
Program
CO Line Name Assignment
ISDN Port Type
ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode
ISDN Configuration
ISDN Data Link Mode
ISDN TEI Mode
ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber
Number
[428] ISDN Extension Progress Tone
COS Programming
[500]–[501] Toll Restriction Level—Day/
Night
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
[507] Do Not Disturb Override
[508] Account Code Entry Mode
[509]–[510] Toll Restriction Level for
System Speed Dialing—Day/Night
[511] Door Opener Access
[512] External Relay Access
[513] Night Service Access
[514] Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialing In
Call
[516] Calling Line Identification
Restriction
[517] Connected Line Identification
Restriction
Extension Programming
[600] EXtra Device Port
[601] Class of Service
[602] Extension Group Assignment
[603]–[604] DIL 1:N Extension and Delayed
Ringing—Day/Night
[605]–[606] Outgoing Permitted CO Line
Assignment—Day/Night
[607]–[608] Doorphone Ringing Assignment
—Day/Night
[609] Voice Mail Access Codes
[610] Department Codes
Default
All CO Lines—Enable
Not Stored
All Ports – CO
All Ports – Permanent
All Ports – Point
All Ports – Permanent
All Ports – Fix 0
All Ports – Disable
All Ports – Disable
All COS=Level 1—Day/Night
All COS=Enable
All COS=Disable
All COS=Disable
All COS=Enable
All COS=Disable
All COS=Option
All COS=Level 1—Day/Night
All COS–Enable
All COS–Enable
All COS–Enable
All COS–Disable
All COS–Disable
All COS–Disable
All Jacks=Disable
All Jacks-1/2=COS 1
All Jacks-1/2=Extension Group 1
All Jacks-1/2=All CO Lines= Immdt
(Immediate Ringing)—Day/Night
All Jacks-1/2=All CO Lines=Enable—Day/
Night
Jack 01-1= All Doorphones (1,2); Other
Jacks=Disable—Day/Night
Not Stored
List
5-7
5.2
Default Values
Address
Program
[611] Extension Connection Assignment
[612] Data Line Security
[613] ISDN Class of Service
[614] Department Codes of ISDN Port
[615]–[616] Outgoing Permitted CO Line
Assignment—Day/Night for ISDN
Extension
†[617]
Live Call Screening Recording Mode
Assignment
Resource Programming
[800] SMDR Incoming / Outgoing Call
Log Printout
[801] SMDR Format
[802] System Data Printout
[803] Music Source Use
[804] External Pager BGM
[805] External Pager Confirmation Tone
[806]–[807] Serial Interface (RS-232C)
Parameters—Port 1/Port 2*
[813]
*[814]
[990]
[991]
Floating Number Assignment
Modem Standard
Option Programming
System Additional Information
COS Additional Information
Default
Not Stored
All Jacks–Connect
All Jacks–Off
All Ports – COS 1
All Ports – Not Stored
All Ports – All CO Lines – Enabl—Day/
Night
All Jacks – Stop Rec (Stop Recording)
Outgoing Calls=Off;
Incoming Calls=Off
Page Length=66; Skip Perforation=0
Not Applicable
Hold and BGM=Music 1
All External Pagers=Disable
On
New Line Code=CR+LF; Baud rate=9600;
Word length=8; Parity bit= NONE; Stop
Bits=1 — Port1/Port2*
Pager 1=296, Pager 2=297; Pager 3*=396;
Pager 4*=397; MODEM*=299, UCD Grp 1
through 8=281 through 288; DTA=399;
Ringer 1=298; Ringer 2*=398
CCITT
See pages 4-147 through 4-152.
†: Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic
Voice Processing System (one that supports proprietary telephone integration;
e.g. KX-TVP100)
5-8
List
*: Available for KX-TD1232 only.
Section 6
Troubleshooting
This section provides information for system and telephone
troubleshooting.
6.1
6.1.1
Troubleshooting
Installation
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
Extension does not operate. Bad printed circuit board
(Extension Card).
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Exchange printed circuit board for
another printed circuit board.
Bad connection between
the system and extension.
Take that extension and plug it into
the same extension port using a
short telephone cord. If the
telephone does not work,
connection between the system and
the extension must be repaired.
Bad extension.
Take that extension and plug it into
another extension port that is
working. If the telephone does not
work, replace the phone.
Press the Reset Button.
Improper reset operation.
Noise in external paging.
Induced noise on the wire Use a shielded cable as the
between the system and the connection wire between the
system and amplifier. A short
amplifier.
shielded cable is recommended.
Volume distortion from
external music source.
Excessive input level from
external music source.
Decrease the output level of the
external music source by using the
volume control on the music
source.
Speed Dialing or OneTouch Dialing does not
function.
Bad programming.
Enter the CO line access number
(0, 81 through 88) into programming.
ISDN Line does not operate ISDN Line is installed only Move the ISDN card to master
system.
in the Slave system.
properly.
6-2
Troubleshooting
6.1
6.1.2
Troubleshooting
Connection
Connection between the system and a proprietary telephone:
Can you dial
an extension?
No
CAUSE
The T/R is connected to the D1/D2.
D1 •
T•
R•
D2 •
System
• D1
•T
•R
• D2
SOLUTION
Use the correct cord (inner 2
wires are for T/R and the
outer 2 wires are for D1/D2).
extension
Connection between the KX-TD1232 and a single line telephone:
CAUSE
The T/R is connected to the D1/D2.
D1 •
T•
R•
D2 •
System
SOLUTION
Use the correct cord (inner 2
wires are for T/R).
•
•T
•R
•
extension
Yes
Connection between the KX-TD1232 and a single line telephone that is
polarity-sensitive:
CAUSE
The “T” is connected to the “R.”
(Continued to the
following page.)
D1 •
T•
R•
D2 •
System
SOLUTION
Reverse the connections of
the T/R.
•
•T
•R
•
extension
Troubleshooting
6-3
6.1
Troubleshooting
Connection between the central office and the system:
(Continued from the
previous page.)
Can you dial
out on a CO
line?
No
CAUSE
CO lines are connected to the T1/T2.
•
•
• T1
• R1
• T2
• R2
CO line
System
SOLUTION
Reconnect the CO lines to
the T1/R1 or T2/R2 of the
telephone jack using 2conductor wiring.
CO lines are connected to the T2/R1.
•
•
CO line
6.1.3
• T1
• R1
• T2
• R2
System
Operation
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
• When using the speakerphone mode with a PT,
KX-T7230/
KX-T7235/KX-T7250
nothing is audible.
• The “HEADSET” mode
is selected by Station
Programming,“Handset/
Headset Selection.”
• When the headset is not used,
select the “HANDSET” mode by
Station Programming.
The unit does not ring.
• The Ringer Volume
Selector is set to “OFF.”
• Set to “HIGH” or “LOW.”
6-4
Troubleshooting
6.1
Troubleshooting
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
• During system connection Interface between the
operation for KX TD1232, systems is disconnected.
originating an intercom/
outside call from a system
to the other system is not
possible.
• The indicators “System
Link Down” is displayed
on the proprietary
telephone of Operator 1.
POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Connect the interface between the
systems and press the Reset Button
on both systems.
Originating an outside call, The corresponding CO
Program the CO button. See
Call Transfer, or Conference button does not exist on the Section 4.2 [005] “Flexible CO
cannot be performed.
Button Assignment.”
proprietary telephone.
6.1.4
Using Reset Button
If the system does not operate properly, use the Reset Button.
(If Master and Slave Systems are in operation by System
Connection for KX-TD1232, reset both systems.)
Before using the Reset Button, try the system feature again to
confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not.
Notes:
(a) When the System Clear Switch is set to “NORMAL,” pressing
the Reset Button causes the following:
1. Camp-On is cleared.
2. Calls on Hold are terminated.
3. Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated.
4. Calls in progress are terminated.
5. Call Park is cleared.
Other data stored in memory except the above are not cleared.
(b) When the System Clear Switch is set to the “CLEAR” position,
you must press the Reset Button with caution, because all data
stored in memory will be cleared by the following operation:
pressing the Reset Button and setting the System Clear Switch
to the “ NORMAL” position while the Power Indicator is
flashing(approximately within 10 seconds).
Troubleshooting
6-5
6.1
Troubleshooting
Operation
(A) If the system does not operate properly,
1. Make sure that the System Clear Switch is set to the
“NORMAL” position.
2. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool.
(B) If the system still does not operate properly,
1. Set the System Clear Switch to the “CLEAR” position.
2. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool.
3. Return the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL”
position while the Power Indicator is flashing (approximately within 10 seconds).
Note: As a result of this measure, all the programmed data
will be cleared.
(C) If the system still does not work, unplug the system and plug it
again after five minutes.
(D) If the system still does not work,
1. Unplug the system.
2. Set the System Clear Switch to the “CLEAR” position.
3. Plug the system.
4. Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool.
5. Set the System Clear Switch to the “NORMAL” position
while the Power Indicator is flashing (approximately
within 10 seconds).
(E) If the system still does not work, unplug the system. Then
consult an authorized service person.
6-6
Troubleshooting
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Central P.O. Box 288, Osaka 530-91, Japan
Printed in Japan
PSQX1070ZA KW1195KM0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement